Contents

Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country PDF

1 of 444
1 of 444

Summary of Content for Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL

VLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).

2

INTRODUCTION This is how you find owner's information 12

Digital owner's manual in the car 13

Volvo Cars support site 15

Reading the owner's manual 16

Recording data 19

Accessories and extra equipment 20

Volvo ID 21

Environmental philosophy 22

The owner's manual and the environment 25

Laminated glass 25

SAFETY General information on seatbelts 28

Seatbelt - putting on 29

Seatbelt - loosening 30

Seatbelt - pregnancy 30

Seatbelt reminder 31

Seatbelt tensioner 31

Safety - warning symbol 32

Airbag system 33

Driver airbag 34

Passenger airbag 34

Passenger airbag - activating/deac- tivating*

36

Side airbag (SIPS) 38

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 39

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)

39

WHIPS - seating position 40

Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) 41

General information on safety mode 42

Safety mode - attempting to start the car 43

Safety mode - moving the car 43

General information on child safety 44

Child seats 45

Child seats - location 50

Child seat - two-stage booster seat* 51

Two-stage booster seat* - raising 52

Two-stage booster seat* - lowering 53

Child seat - ISOFIX 54

ISOFIX - size classes 55

ISOFIX - types of child seat 56

Child seats - upper mounting points 58

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview

60

Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview

63

Combined instrument panel 66

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview

66

Digital combined instrument panel - overview

67

Eco guide & Power guide* 70

Combined instrument panel - mean- ing of indicator symbols

71

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols

73

Outside temperature gauge 75

Trip meter 75

Clock 76

Combined instrument panel - license agreement

76

Symbols in the display 77

Volvo Sensus 80

Key positions 81

Key positions - functions at different levels

81

Seats, front 83

Seats, front - electrically operated* 84

Seats, rear 85

Steering wheel 88

Heating* of the steering wheel 89

Light switches 90

Position lamps 91

Daytime running lights 92

Tunnel detection* 93

Main/dipped beam 93

Active main beam* 94

Active Xenon headlamps* 96

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern 97

Rear fog lamp 97

Brake lights 98

Hazard warning flashers 98

direction indicators 99

Interior lighting 100

Home safe lighting 101

Approach lighting 101

Wipers and washers 102

Power windows 104

Door mirrors 106

Windows and rearview and door mir- rors - heating

107

Rearview mirror - interior 108

Compass* 108

Sunroof* 110

Menu navigation - combined instru- ment panel

112

Menu overview - combined instru- ment panel

113

Messages 113

Messages - handling 114

MY CAR 115

Trip computer 116

Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel

118

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel

121

Trip computer - trip statistics* 124

4

CLIMATE CONTROL General information on climate control 126

Actual temperature 127

Sensors - climate control 127

Air quality 127

Air quality - passenger compartment filter 128

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*

128

Air quality - IAQS* 128

Air quality - material 129

Menu settings - climate control 129

Air distribution in the passenger compartment

129

Electronic climate control - ECC 132

Heated front seats* 133

Heated rear seat* 134

Fan 134

Auto-regulation 135

Temperature control in the passen- ger compartment

135

Air conditioning 136

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen 136

Air distribution - recirculation 137

Air distribution - table 138

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

140

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start

141

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop

142

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer

142

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages

144

Additional heater* 146

Fuel-driven additional heater* 146

Electric additional heater* 147

LOADING AND STORAGE Storage spaces 150

Tunnel console 152

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray*

152

Glovebox 152

Inlaid mats* 153

Vanity mirror 153

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets 153

Loading 154

Loading - long load 155

Roof load 156

Load retaining eyelets 156

Loading - bag holder* 156

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* 157

Safety net* 157

Safety grille* 159

Cargo cover* 159

5

LOCKS AND ALARM Remote control key 162

Remote control key - losing 162

Remote control key - personalisation* 163

Locking/unlocking - indicator 164

Lock indicator 164

Immobiliser 165

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system*

165

Remote control key - functions 166

Remote control key - range 167

Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions

167

Remote control key with PCC* - range 168

Detachable key blade 169

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching

169

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 170

Privacy locking* 171

Remote control key - replacing the battery

172

Keyless drive* 173

Keyless Drive* - remote control key range

174

Keyless drive* - secure handling of the remote control key

174

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function

175

Keyless Drive* - locking 175

Keyless drive* - unlocking 176

Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade

176

Keyless Drive* - lock settings 177

Keyless Drive* - antenna location 177

Locking/unlocking - from the outside 178

Manual locking of the door 178

Locking/unlocking - from the inside 179

Global opening 180

Locking/unlocking - glovebox 181

Locking/unlocking - tailgate 181

Deadlocks* 183

Child safety locks - manual activation 184

Child safety locks - electrical activation* 184

Alarm* 185

Alarm indicator* 186

Alarm* - automatic re-arming 186

Alarm* - remote control key not working 187

Alarm signals* 187

Reduced alarm level* 187

Type approval - remote control key system

188

DRIVER SUPPORT Active chassis - Four C* 190

Adjustable steering force* 190

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

191

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

192

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages

193

Speed limiter* 195

Speed limiter* - getting started 195

Speed limiter* - changing speed 196

Speed limiter* - temporary deactiva- tion and standby mode

196

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded

197

Speed limiter* - deactivation 197

Cruise control* 198

Cruise control* - managing speed 199

Cruise control* temporary deactiva- tion and standby mode

199

Cruise control* - resume set speed 200

Cruise control* - deactivate 200

Distance Warning* 201

Distance Warning* - limitations 202

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages

203

6

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* 204

Adaptive cruise control* - function 205

Adaptive cruise control* - overview 206

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed

207

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval

209

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode

209

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle

210

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate 211

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance

211

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality

213

Adaptive cruise control* - fault trac- ing and action

214

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages

215

Radar sensor 217

Radar sensor - limitations 217

Type approval - radar system 219

City Safety 222

City Safety - function 223

City Safety - operation 223

City Safety - limitations 224

City Safety - laser sensor 226

City Safety - symbols and messages 228

Collision warning system* 229

Collision warning system* - function 230

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists

231

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians

232

Collision warning system* - operation 233

Collision warning system* - limitations 235

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations

236

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages

238

BLIS* 240

BLIS* - operation 241

CTA* 242

BLIS - symbols and messages 244

Road Sign Information (RSI)* 244

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 245

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 248

Driver Alert System* 248

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* 249

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation 249

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages

251

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* 252

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function

253

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation

254

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations

254

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages

255

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* 256

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function 257

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation 258

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations 259

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and messages

260

Park Assist* 261

Park assist syst* - function 261

Park assist syst* - backward 262

Park assist syst* - forward 263

Park assist syst* - fault indication 264

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors 264

Park assist camera* 265

Park assist camera - settings 267

Park assist camera - limitations 268

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 268

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function 269

7

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation 270

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations 272

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and messages

273

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the engine 276

Switching off the engine 277

Steering lock 277

Remote start (ERS)* 277

Remote start (ERS) - operation 278

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages

279

Jump starting with another battery 281

Gearboxes 282

Manual gearbox 282

Gear shift indicator* 283

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* 284

Gear selector inhibitor 287

Hill start assist (HSA)* 288

All-wheel drive - (AWD)* 288

Hill Descent Control (HDC)* 289

Start/Stop* 290

Start/Stop* - function and operation 291

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop 292

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts 293

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start

294

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox

295

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages 296

Drive mode ECO* 298

Foot brake 300

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system 301

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers

302

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance 302

Parking brake 303

Driving in water 307

Overheating 307

Driving with open tailgate/boot lid 308

Overload - starter battery 308

Before a long journey 309

Winter driving 309

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing 310

Fuel filler flap - manual opening 310

Filling up with fuel 310

Fuel - handling 311

Fuel - petrol 312

Fuel - diesel 313

Diesel particle filter (DPF) 314

Catalytic converters 315

Economical driving 316

Driving with a trailer* 317

Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox 318

8

Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox 318

Towing bracket/Towbar* 319

Detachable towbar* - storage 320

Detachable towbar* - specifications 320

Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal

321

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA 323

Towing 324

Towing eye 325

Recovery 326

WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres - maintenance 330

Tyres - direction of rotation 331

Tyres - tread wear indicators 332

Tyres - air pressure 332

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions 334

Tyres - dimensions 334

Tyres - load index 335

Tyres - speed ratings 335

Wheel bolts 336

Winter tyres 336

Changing wheels - removing wheels 337

Changing wheels - fitting 340

Warning triangle 341

Tools 341

Jack* 342

First aid kit* 342

Tyre pressure monitoring* 343

Tyre monitoring (TM)* 343

Emergency puncture repair 345

Emergency puncture repair kit - location 346

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview 346

Emergency puncture repair - operation 347

Emergency puncture repair - rechecking 349

Emergency puncture repair kit - inflating the tyres

350

9

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 352

Book service and repair* 352

Raising the car 355

Bonnet - opening and closing 357

Engine compartment - overview 357

Engine compartment - checking 358

Engine oil - general 359

Engine oil - checking and filling 360

Coolant - level 362

Brake and clutch fluid - level 363

Power steering fluid - level 364

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair

365

Lamp replacement - general 365

Lamp replacement - headlamps 367

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs

368

Lamp replacement - dipped beam 368

Lamp replacement - main beam 369

Lamp replacement - extra main beam 370

Lamp replacement - direction indica- tors front

370

Lamp replacement - rear lamp 371

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps

371

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting

372

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area

372

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting 372

Lamps - specifications 373

Wiper blades 374

Washer fluid - filling 376

Starter battery - general 377

Battery - symbols 378

Starter battery - replacement 379

Battery - Start/Stop 380

Electrical system 383

Fuses - general 383

Fuses - in engine compartment 385

Fuses - under glovebox 389

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox

391

Fuses - in cargo area 393

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone

395

Car wash 397

Polishing and waxing 399

Water and dirt-repellent coating 399

Rustproofing 400

Cleaning the interior 400

Paint damage 402

10

SPECIFICATIONS Type designations 406

Dimensions 409

Weights 410

Towing capacity and towball load 411

Engine specifications 412

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions 413

Engine oil - grade and volume 414

Coolant - grade and volume 416

Transmission fluid - grade and volume 417

Brake fluid - grade and volume 418

Power steering fluid - grade 418

Fuel tank - volume 419

Specifications for air conditioning 420

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 422

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions 425

Load index and speed rating 426

Tyres - approved tyre pressures 427

ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 429

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

12

This is how you find owner's information Owner's information is available in several differ- ent product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a sup- plement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse informa- tion, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered.

The car's screen1

A digital version of the owner's manual is available in the car's screen. Press the MY CAR but- ton in the centre console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. The infor- mation is searchable and can

also be subdivided into categories.

Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the car.

Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car.

The app contains video tutorials as well as options for visual navigation with exte- rior and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devi- ces.

Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and

help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- ship. The page is available for most markets. Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.

Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual2 in the glove- box that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.

There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.

Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car.

A printed owner's manual and associated supple- ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order. See how the owner's manual is structured in Reading the owner's manual.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen. 2 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.

INTRODUCTION

}}

13

Changing the language in the car's screen Changing the language in the car's display may mean that some information does not correspond to national or local laws and regulations. Don't change to a language that's difficult to under- stand, it may then be difficult to find your way back in the structure on the screen.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica- ble laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recom- mendations in the owner's information.

If there should be a difference between the information in the screen and the printed information then it is always the printed infor- mation that applies.

Related information Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 13)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

Reading the owner's manual (p. 16)

Digital owner's manual in the car The owner's manual can be read on the screen

in the car3. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.

Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press OK/ MENU and select Owner's manual.

For basic navigation, see Operating the system. See below for a more detailed description.

Owner's manual, start page.

There are four options for finding information in the digital owner's manual:

Search - Search function for finding an arti- cle.

Categories - All articles sorted into catego- ries.

Favourites - Quick access to favourite- bookmarked articles.

Quick Guide - A selection of articles for common functions.

Select the information symbol in the lower right- hand corner in order to obtain information about the digital owner's manual.

NOTE

The digital owner's manual is not available while driving.

Search

Searching using the character wheel.

Character list.

Changing the input mode (see following table).

3 Applies to certain car models.

||

INTRODUCTION

14

Use the character wheel to enter a search term, e.g. "seatbelt".

1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/ MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used.

2. Continue with the next letter and so on.

3. To change the input mode to numbers or special characters, or to perform a search, turn TUNE to one of the options (see explan- ation in the following table) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/ MENU.

123/AB C

Change between letters and num- bers with OK/MENU.

MORE Change to special characters with OK/MENU.

OK Perform the search. Turn TUNE to select a search result article, press OK/MENU to go to the article.

a|A Changes between lowercase and uppercase letters with OK/MENU.

| | } Changes from the character wheel to the search field. Move the cur- sor with TUNE. Delete any mis- spelling with EXIT. To return to the character wheel, press OK/MENU.

Note that the digit and letter but- tons on the control panel can be used for editing in the search field.

Enter with the numerical keyboard

Numerical keyboard.

Another way of entering characters is to use the centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.

When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and 9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor through these characters.

Stop with the cursor on the desired character in order to select it - the character is shown on the enter line.

Delete/undo using EXIT.

To enter a number, hold in the corresponding number key.

Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be in several appropriate cate- gories in order to be found more easily.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and press OK/MENU to open a category - selected

- or article - selected . Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Favourites Located here are the articles that are saved as favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see the heading "Navigating in an article" below.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

4 The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 15

Quick Guide Located here is a selection of articles for getting to know the car's most common functions. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access.

Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Navigating in an article

Home - leads to the start page for the owner's manual.

Favourite - adds/removes an article as a favourite. You can also press the FAV button in the centre console to add/remove an arti- cle as a favourite.

Highlighted link - leads to linked article.

Special texts - if the article contains warn- ings, important or note texts then an associ-

ated symbol is shown here as well as the number of such texts in the article.

Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled to the start/end of an article the home and favourite options are accessed by scrolling a fur- ther step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go back to the previous view.

Volvo Cars support site There is additional information regarding your car on the Volvo Cars website and support page. From the website, it is also possible to navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web page for you and your car.

Support on the Internet

Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code below to visit the page. The support page is avail- able for most markets.

QR code that leads to the support page.

The information on the support page is searcha- ble and can also be subdivided into different cat- egories. Available here is support for options rela- ted to e.g. Internet connected services and func- tions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how the car is con- nected to the Internet via a mobile phone.

||

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.16

Downloadable information from the support page

Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there is the facility to download maps from the support page.

Apps For selected Volvo models from model year 2014 and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also be accessed from here.

Owner's manuals from previous model years Owner's manuals from previous model years are available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide and supplement can also be accessed from the support page. Select car model and model year in order to download the publication required.

Contact On the support page there is contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo dealer.

My Volvo on the Internet5

From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate through to My Volvo Web which is a personal Web page for you and your car.

Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo Web and get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things. At My

Volvo Web there is also information about acces- sories and software adapted for your car model.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 21)

Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey.

Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situa- tions and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's man- ual.

Development work is constantly in progress to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifica- tions without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation

IMPORTANT

Do not remove this manual from the car - should a problem arise then the information required about where and how to seek pro- fessional help would be missing.

5 Applies to certain markets.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 17

Owner's Manual in mobile devices

NOTE

The Owner's manual is available for download as a mobile application (applies for certain car models and mobile devices), see www.volvocars.com.

The mobile application also includes video and searchable content and easy navigation between different sections.

Options/accessories All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Footnote There is footnote information in the owner's man- ual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts In the car there are displays that show menu texts and message texts. In the owner's manual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and mes- sage texts: Media, Sending location.

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of impor- tance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indi- cate the presence of danger which, if the warning

||

INTRODUCTION

18

is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G 0 3 1 5 9 2

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

G 0 3 1 5 9 3

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a cer- tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man- ual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is num- bered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.

Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instruc- tions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

INTRODUCTION

}}

19

Coolant

Engine oil

Related information Related information refers to other articles con- taining closely-associated information.

Images The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.

To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page.

Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 25)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

Recording data As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.

This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- ter and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:

How the various systems in the car worked

Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned

The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal

The travel speed of the vehicle

This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal

driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- uation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- tered data.

In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa- tion of the vehicle's active driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).

Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- cle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the registered informa- tion can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of contin- uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory.20

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties with- out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- icing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

Accessories and extra equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system.

Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories or extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Heat-reflecting windscreen* The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflect- ing film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat- reflecting film may affect its function and per- formance.

For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of the wind- screen with no heat-reflecting film (see the high- lighted area in the illustration).

Areas where IR film is not applied.

A is the distance from the top edge of the wind- screen down to the start of the field. B is the dis- tance from the top edge of the windscreen down to the end of the field.

Dimensions

A 40 mm

B 80 mm

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 21

Volvo ID Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides

access to various services6.

Examples of services:

My Volvo - Your personal web page for you and your car.

In an Internet-connected car* - Certain func- tions and services require that you have reg- istered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for example to be able to send a new address from a map service on the Internet directly to the car.

Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log- ging in to the Volvo On Call app.

Advantages of Volvo ID One user name and one password to access

online services, i.e. only one username and one password to remember.

When changing the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) it will also be changed automatically for other services (e.g. My Volvo)

Create a Volvo ID To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in the e-mail message that is automatically sent to the specified address in order to complete the

registration. It is possible to create a Volvo ID via one of the following services:

My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and fol- low the instructions.

For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo ID and follow the instructions. Alternatively,

press the Connect button in the centre

console twice and select Apps Settings and follow the instructions.

Volvo On Call* - Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail address and follow the instructions.

Related information Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)

6 The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.

INTRODUCTION

22

Environmental philosophy Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient

products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core val- ues and influences all operations. The environ- mental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.

Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of the more efficient and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air

inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.

Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the opera- tion's environmental issues, which leads to con- tinuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.

Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- sumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

INTRODUCTION

}}

* Option/accessory. 23

Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment - here is some advice:

Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below 50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.

Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and main- tenance of the car.

Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater*, use it before starting from cold - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather and the engine reaches nor- mal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.

Also remember to always dispose of environmen- tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-

shop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Following this advice can save money, the plan- et's resources are saved, and the car's durability is extended. For more information and further advice see Eco guide (p. 70), Economical driv- ing (p. 316) and Fuel consumption (p. 422).

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encom- passes a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- ble standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger compart- ment via the air intake.

The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.

The system cleans the air in the passenger com- partment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.

Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- edge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is

||

INTRODUCTION

24

therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer- ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Related information The owner's manual and the environment

(p. 25)

INTRODUCTION

* Option/accessory. 25

The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual

comes from Forest Stewardship Council certi- fied forests or other controlled sources.

The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC certi- fied forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Environmental philosophy (p. 22)

Laminated glass

The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the pas- senger compartment. The windscreen

and other windows* have laminated glass.

SAFETY

SAFETY

28

General information on seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all pas- sengers are using their seatbelts during the jour- ney.

Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 31).

Remember Do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.

The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught on anything.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seat- belt must be type-approved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)

SAFETY

29

Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 28) before driving starts.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked.

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat1.

Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Related information Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

1 Certain markets.

SAFETY

30

Seatbelt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is sta- tionary.

Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.

G 0 2 0 9 9 8

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- der then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat (p. 83) and steering wheel (p. 88) such that they can easily maintain con- trol of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot ped- als and steering wheel). The aim should be to

position the seat with as large a distance as pos- sible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)

Seatbelt - loosening (p. 30)

SAFETY

31

Seatbelt reminder Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder.

G 0 1 7 7 2 6

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the com- bined instrument panel (p. 66).

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts (p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instru- ment panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened.

The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk OK button (p. 112).

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during travel. This warn- ing takes the form of a message in the com- bined instrument panel along with the audio/ visual signal. The warning stops when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button.

The message in the combined instrument panel showing which seatbelts are in use is always shown. Press the OK button to see stored mes- sages.

Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 sec- onds.

Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts (p. 28) are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten- sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suf- ficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro- vides more effective restraint for the occupants.

WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any for- eign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

SAFETY

32

Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) information display.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem (p. 33) in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag sys- tem in the digital combined instrument panel.

The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 81). The symbol clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag sys- tem is fault-free.

WARNING If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the sys- tem. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service required or SRS airbag Service urgent

appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop imme- diately.

Related information General information on safety mode (p. 42)

SAFETY

}}

33

Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag sys- tem helps to protect the head, face and chest of the driver and passenger.

G 0 1 8 6 6 5

Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.

G 0 1 8 6 6 6

Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car.

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and defla- tion of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a sec- ond.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is rec- ommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed air- bags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

WARNING The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

WARNING Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defec- tive work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.

||

SAFETY

34

Related information Driver airbag (p. 34)

Passenger airbag (p. 34)

Safety - warning symbol (p. 32)

Driver airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) the car is equipped on the driv- er's side with an airbag (p. 33).

This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Related information Passenger airbag (p. 34)

Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 28) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 33).

The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand drive car.

SAFETY

}}

35

Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand drive car.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Failure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.36

Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deactivated (p. 36) if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

WARNING If the car is equipped with an airbag for the front passenger seat, but does not have a switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be acti- vated.

Related information Driver airbag (p. 34)

Child seats (p. 45)

Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating* The front passenger airbag (p. 34) can be deac- tivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade (p. 169) should be used to change position.

Location of airbag switch.

ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, all front-facing passengers

(children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.

OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the front pas- senger seat.

WARNING Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is activated.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

NOTE

When the remote control key is in key posi- tion II (p. 81) the warning symbol (p. 32) for the airbag is shown in the combined instru- ment panel for approx. 6 seconds.

Following which, the indicator in the roof con- sole is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.

SAFETY

37

G 0 1 7 8 0 0

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front seat if the passenger airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illumi- nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

2

2

G 0 1 7 7 2 4

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deacti- vated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the message in the roof con- sole indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol (p. 32) for the air- bag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the lives of passengers in the car.

Related information Child seats (p. 45)

SAFETY

38

Side airbag (SIPS) In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.

G 0 3 2 9 4 9

The SIPS bag system consists of two main com- ponents, side airbag and sensors. The side air- bags are located in the front seat's backrests.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo work- shop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

SIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

Related information Driver airbag (p. 34)

Passenger airbag (p. 34)

Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 39)

SAFETY

}}

39

Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.

Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of the SIPS system (p. 38) and the airbag system (p. 33). It is fitted along both sides of the headlin- ing and helps protect the driver and passengers in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent colli- sion trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the windows in the doors. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information General information on seatbelts (p. 28)

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection) WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro- tection against whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front seats.

||

SAFETY

40

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end col- lision, where the angle and speed of the collision,

and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

WARNING The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Seat properties When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Related information WHIPS - seating position (p. 40)

General information on seatbelts (p. 28)

WHIPS - seating position For optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 39) the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.

Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 83) before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

Function

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS sys- tem from functioning.

SAFETY

41

WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the cor- responding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the folded backrest.

WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo rec- ommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end col- lision.

Roll Over Protection System (ROPS) Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) has been designed to reduce the risk of the car overturning and to provide the best possible pro- tection in the event of such an accident.

The system consists of two parts, a preventive stabilising system and a protective system.

The stabilising system Roll Stability Control (RSC) minimises the risk of overturning, for example during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids.

The RSC system uses a sensor which registers changes in the car's lateral inclination angle. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If a risk exists then the ESC system (p. 191) engages, engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability.

If a rollover accident still occurs, the protective system intervenes and, depending on the situa- tion, may activate the car's seatbelt tensioner (p. 31) and inflatable curtains (p. 39).

WARNING Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys- tem improves the car's road safety, but this must not be seen as an opportunity to increase speed. Always follow the normal pre- cautions for safe driving.

SAFETY

42

General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument panel.

If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) information display. This means that the car has reduced functional- ity.

WARNING Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

Related information Safety mode - attempting to start the car

(p. 43)

Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)

SAFETY

43

Safety mode - attempting to start the car If the car is set in safety mode (p. 42) then an attempt to start the car can be made if every- thing seems normal and the absence of fuel leakage has been checked.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start but- ton. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.

If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service (p. 326) used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis- played. Leave the car at once.

WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)

Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 43) , the car can be moved care- fully out of a dangerous position.

Do not move the car further than necessary.

Related information General information on safety mode (p. 42)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.44

General information on child safety Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car.

Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti- mum conditions are obtained for the child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits well and is simple to use.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front- facing booster cushions/child seats until the child is 140 cm tall.

NOTE

Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child safety locks The rear doors and the windows in the rear doors* can be locked manually (p. 184) or elec- tronically (p. 184)* to prevent them being opened from inside.

Related information Child seats - location (p. 50)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 58)

SAFETY

}}

45

Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is impor- tant to read the installation instructions included.

WARNING Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

Recommended child seats2

Weight Front seat (with deactivated

airbag, only rear-facing child

seats)

Front seat (with activated

airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seat- belt.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(U)

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

||

SAFETY

46

Weight Front seat (with deactivated

airbag, only rear-facing child

seats)

Front seat (with activated

airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg

Group 0+

max 13 kg

Child seats which are univer- sally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are univer- sally approved.

(U)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Group 1

9-18 kg

Front-facing child seats which are universally approved.A

(UF)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)

Child seats which are univer- sally approved.

(U)

SAFETY

}}

47

Weight Front seat (with deactivated

airbag, only rear-facing child

seats)

Front seat (with activated

airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

(L)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Volvo rear-facing child seat

Type approval: E5 04212

(L)

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seat- belt.

Type approval: E5 04191

(U)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

Volvo booster seat with back- rest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

(UF)

||

SAFETY

48

Weight Front seat (with deactivated

airbag, only rear-facing child

seats)

Front seat (with activated

airbag, only front-facing

child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 04216

(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat

Type approval: E1 04301312

(UF)

Volvo booster seat

Type approval: E1 04301312

(UF, L)

Volvo booster seat

Type approval: E1 04301312

(UF)

Group 2/3

15-36 kg

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fit- ted option.

Type approval: E5 04189

(B)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

SAFETY

49

Related information Child seats - location (p. 50)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 58)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)

General information on child safety (p. 44)

SAFETY

50

Child seats - location The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size.

G 0 2 0 7 3 9

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats (p. 45) in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated (p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- senger seat.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side's sun visor.

Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

You may place:

a rear-facing child seat on the front passen- ger seat when the passenger airbag is deac- tivated.

a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the passen- ger airbag is activated.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat protected by an activated airbag. Failure to follow this advice can lead to death or serious injury to the child.

WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 51

WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of chil- dren in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

Related information Child seats (p. 45)

General information on child safety (p. 44)

Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 58)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)

Child seat - two-stage booster seat* The integrated booster seats in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably and safely.

The booster cushions are specially designed to provide optimum safety. In combination with the seatbelt (p. 28) they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height.

Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.

Incorrect positioning, the seatbelt must not be placed beneath the shoulder.

Check before driving that:

the integrated two-stage booster seat is cor- rectly set in accordance with the table (p. 52) and in locked position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder (see preceding illustrations)

the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec- tion.

Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is per- formed by raising (p. 52) and lowering (p. 53).

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.52

WARNING Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an inte- grated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

WARNING If the instructions for the two-stage booster seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an acci- dent.

Two-stage booster seat* - raising The integrated booster seat (p. 51) in the rear seat can be folded up into two stages. How many stages the cushion should be folded up depends on the child's weight.

Stage 1 Stage 2

Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg

Stage 13

Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion.

Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.

3 Lower stage.

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 53

Stage 24

Start from the lower stage. Press the button. Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the booster seat from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded down (p. 53) into the seat cushion.

Related information Two-stage booster seat* - lowering (p. 53)

Two-stage booster seat* - lowering The integrated booster seat (p. 51) in the rear seat can be folded down from the upper or lower stage to fully lowered position in the seat cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from the upper stage to the lower stage.

Pull the handle forwards to release the cush- ion.

4 Upper stage.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.54

Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cush- ion before lowering.

NOTE

Before the rear backrest is lowered, the booster cushion must be lowered first.

Related information Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 52)

Child seat - ISOFIX ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 45) that is based on an international stand- ard.

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- ceding illustration).

Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

Related information ISOFIX - size classes (p. 55)

ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 56)

General information on child safety (p. 44)

SAFETY

55

ISOFIX - size classes There is a size classification for child seats using the ISOFIX (p. 54) fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct type of child seat (p. 56).

Size

class

Description

A Full size, front-facing child seat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt. 2), front-facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing child seat

D Reduced size, rear-facing child seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

F Transverse infant seat, left-hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-hand

WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifica- tion, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recom- mends.

SAFETY

56

ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in dif- ferent sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK

(IL)

C X OK

(IL)

SAFETY

57

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA

(IUF)

B1 X OKA

(IUF)

A X OKA

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class (p. 55) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 54) fixture system.

SAFETY

58

Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 45). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recom- mends that small children should sit in rear-fac- ing child seats to as late an age as possible.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.

Related information General information on child safety (p. 44)

Child seats - location (p. 50)

Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 54)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

60

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

61

Overview, left-hand drive cars

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.62

Function See

Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 112), (p. 114), (p. 99), (p. 93) and (p. 116).

Manual gear changing in an automatic gear- box*

(p. 284).

Cruise control* (p. 198) and (p. 204).

Horn, airbags (p. 88) and (p. 33).

Combined instrument panel

(p. 66).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 276).

Ignition switch (p. 81).

Screen for infotain- ment system and dis- play of menus

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Function See

Door handle -

Control panel (p. 179), (p. 184), (p. 104) and (p. 106).

Hazard warning flash- ers

(p. 98).

Control panel for info- tainment system and menu navigation

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Control panel for cli- mate control

(p. 132).

Gear selector (p. 282) or (p. 284).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 190).

Wipers and washing (p. 102).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 88).

Bonnet opener (p. 357).

Parking brake (p. 303).

Function See

Seat adjustment* (p. 84).

Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate

(p. 90), (p. 310) and (p. 181).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)

Trip meter (p. 75)

Clock (p. 76)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

63

Instruments and controls, right- hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

64

Overview, right-hand drive cars

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 65

Function See

Screen for infotain- ment system and dis- play of menus

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Ignition switch (p. 81).

START/STOP ENGINE button

(p. 276).

Manual gear changing in an automatic gear- box*

(p. 284).

Cruise control* (p. 198) and (p. 204).

Combined instrument panel

(p. 66).

Horn, airbags (p. 88) and (p. 33).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Wipers and washing (p. 102).

Door handle -

Function See

Control panel (p. 179), (p. 184), (p. 104) and (p. 106).

Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate

(p. 90), (p. 310) and (p. 181).

Seat adjustment* (p. 84).

Parking brake (p. 303).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 88).

Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 112), (p. 114), (p. 99), (p. 93) and (p. 116).

Gear selector (p. 282) or (p. 284).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 190).

Control panel for cli- mate control

(p. 132).

Function See

Control panel for info- tainment system and menu navigation

(p. 115) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Hazard warning flash- ers

(p. 98).

Bonnet opener (p. 357).

Related information Outside temperature gauge (p. 75)

Trip meter (p. 75)

Clock (p. 76)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

66

Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Information display

Information display, analogue instrument panel.

The combined instrument panel's information dis- play shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

Gauges and indicators

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and Filling up with fuel (p. 310).

Eco meter. The meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economically the car is driven.

Speedometer

1 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 67

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indicator3

See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols4

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

Information display

Information display, digital instrument panel*.

The combined instrument panel's information dis- play shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

2 Manual gearbox. 3 Automatic gearbox. 4 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see

Engine oil - general (p. 359).

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.68

Gauges and indicators Alternative themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel. Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".

A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.

To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and select the Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel to select the theme and confirm the selection by pressing the OK button.

On certain model variants, the appearance of the centre console's screen follows the theme selected for the combined instrument panel.

The contrast mode and colour mode for the instrument can also be set using the left-hand stalk switch.

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112).

The choice of theme and setting of contrast mode and colour mode can be stored for each remote control key in the car key memory*, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163).

Theme "Elegance"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and Filling up with fuel (p. 310).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant.

Speedometer.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7

See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

Theme "Eco"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and Filling up with fuel (p. 310).

Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).

Speedometer.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 69

Theme "Performance"

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illumi- nated. See also Trip computer (p. 116) and Filling up with fuel (p. 310).

Temperature gauge for engine coolant.

Speedometer.

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).

Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 283) or Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.

Indicator symbols

Indicator and warning symbols

Warning symbols8

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red. 6 Manual gearbox. 7 Automatic gearbox. 8 Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see

Engine oil - general (p. 359).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.70

Eco guide & Power guide* Eco guide and Power guide are two combined instrument panel (p. 66) instruments which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.

The car also stores statistics of journeys made, which can be viewed in the form of a block dia- gram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124).

Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.

To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67).

Instantaneous value

Average value

Instantaneous value The instantaneous value is shown here - the higher the reading on the scale, the better.

The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.

Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.

Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and hence should be avoided.

Average value The average value slowly follows the instantane- ous value and describes how the car has been driven most recently. The higher the pointers on the scale, the better the economy achieved by the driver.

Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.

To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67).

Available engine power

Engine power utilised

Available engine power The smaller, upper pointer shows the available engine power9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is available in the current gear.

Engine power utilised The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.

A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.

9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 71

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- tion is activated, that the system is operating, or that an error or failure has occurred.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system, see Electronic sta- bility control (ESC) - general (p. 191)

Stability system, sport mode, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 192)

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Symbol Specification

Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicator

Right-hand direction indicator

Eco- function on, see Drive mode ECO* (p. 298)

Start/Stop, the engine auto-stop- ped; see Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Tyre pressure system , see Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 343)

ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).

Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system contin- ues to work, but without the ABS function.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability sys- tem is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skid- ding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating takes place mostly due to low tem- perature.

Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.72

Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112), or it disappears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illu- minate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Left/right-hand direction indicator Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

Eco function on This symbol illuminates when the Eco function is activated.

Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is auto-stop- ped.

Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure system.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the infor- mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

information symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

warning symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

10 Only cars with alarm*.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

73

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a serious error or a serious failure has occurred.

Warning symbols

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressureA

Parking brake applied (digital instrument panel)

Parking brake applied (analogue instrument panel)

Airbags SRS

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Warning

A Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pres- sure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pres- sure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 359).

Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The symbol flashes during application, and then changes over to a constant glow.

A flashing symbol in any other situation means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

For more information, see Parking brake (p. 303).

Airbags SRS If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Drive to a workshop for checking as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.74

Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 363).

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- ing.

If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 363). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112). The warn- ing symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Action:

1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car fur- ther.

2. Read the information on the information dis- play. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the infor- mation display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

information symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the

warning symbol illuminates.

If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.

If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

11 Only cars with alarm*.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

75

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71)

Analogue combined instrument panel - over- view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.

Display for outside temperature gauge, digi- tal instrument panel

Display for outside temperature gauge, ana- logue instrument panel

When the temperature lies between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been sta- tionary, the gauge may display a reading that is too high.

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Trip meter, digital instrument panel.

Display for trip meter12

Both trip meters T1 and T2 are used to measure short distances. The distance is shown in the dis- play.

Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel to show the required meter.

A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer (p. 116).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

12 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

76

Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Clock, digital instrument panel.

Display for showing the time13

Setting the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Combined instrument panel (p. 66)

Combined instrument panel - license agreement A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel- oper.

Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice

This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType Project License ("FreeType License") and other different and/or additional copy right licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links to access the exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer.

The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

Portions of this product uses software copyrighted 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.

Portions of this product uses software with Copyright 19942013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio (http://www.lua.org/)

This product includes software under following licenses:

LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- licenses/lgpl-2.1.html

GNU FriBidi

DevIL

The FreeType Project License: http:// git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/ tree/docs/FTL.TXT

FreeType 2

13 The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 77

MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/ mit-license.html

Lua

Symbols in the display There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols.

Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explana- tory text is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel at the same time.

- Information symbol, illuminates in combi- nation with text in the information display in the combined instrument panel, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The infor- mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Low oil pressure (p. 73)

Parking brake applied

(p. 73), (p. 303)

Symbol Specification See

Parking brake applied, alternative symbol

(p. 73)

Airbags SRS (p. 32), (p. 73)

Seatbelt reminder (p. 28), (p. 73)

Alternator not charging

(p. 73)

Fault in brake sys- tem

(p. 73), (p. 300)

Warning, safety mode

(p. 32), (p. 42), (p. 73)

Control symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

ABL fault* (p. 71), (p. 96)

Emissions system (p. 71)

ABS fault (p. 71), (p. 300)

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.78

Symbol Specification See

Rear fog lamp on (p. 71), (p. 97)

Stability system, ESC (Electronic Stability Control), Trailer stability assist

(p. 71), (p. 193), (p. 323)

Stability system, sport mode

(p. 71), (p. 193)

Engine preheater (diesel)

(p. 71)

Low level in fuel tank

(p. 71), (p. 144)

Information, read display text

(p. 71)

Main beam On (p. 71), (p. 93)

Left-hand direction indicators

(p. 71)

Right-hand direc- tion indicators

(p. 71)

Start/Stop*, engine auto-stopped

(p. 71), (p. 296)

Symbol Specification See

ECO function* on (p. 71), (p. 298)

Tyre pressure sys- tem*

(p. 71), (p. 343)

Information symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification See

Cruise control* (p. 198)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*

(p. 215)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*, time interval

(p. 204), (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise con- trol*, Distance Warn- ing* (Distance Alert)

(p. 209), (p. 201)

Radar sensor* (p. 215), (p. 203), (p. 238)

Speed limiter (p. 195)

Symbol Specification See

Windscreen sensor*, Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*

(p. 94), (p. 228), (p. 238), (p. 251), (p. 255), (p. 260)

Auto Brake*, Dis- tance Warning* (Dis- tance Alert), City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*

(p. 203), (p. 228), (p. 238)

ABL system* (p. 96)

Driver Alert System*, Time for a break

(p. 249)

Driver Alert System*, Time for a break

(p. 251)

Parking brake (p. 303)

Rain sensor* (p. 102)

Active main beam, AHB (Active High Beam)*

(p. 94)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 79

Symbol Specification See

Start/Stop* (p. 296)

Start/Stop* (p. 296)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)

(p. 251), (p. 255), (p. 260)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*

(p. 254)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*

(p. 255), (p. 260)

Recorded speed information*

(p. 245)

Engine block and passenger compart- ment heater*

(p. 144)

Symbol Specification See

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* Service required

(p. 144)

Activated timer* (p. 144)

Activated timer* (p. 144)

Low battery (p. 144)

Fuel filler flap, right- hand side

(p. 310)

Gear shift indicator (p. 283)

Gear positions (p. 284)

Measuring the oil level

(p. 360)

Park Assist Pilot - PAP*

(p. 268)

Information symbols in the roof console display

Symbol Specification See

Seatbelt reminder (p. 31)

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

(p. 36)

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

(p. 36)

Related information Combined instrument panel - meaning of

indicator symbols (p. 71)

Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols (p. 73)

Messages - handling (p. 114)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.80

Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo experience and connects you with the car and outside world. Sensus provides information, entertainment and assistance when it is needed. Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both enhance the car journey and simplifies owner- ship of the car.

An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without dis- tracting the driver.

Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable connection* to the outside world and provides you with intuitive control over all the car's capabil- ities.

Volvo Sensus combines and presents many func- tions in several of the car's systems on the centre console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can

be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.

With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many differ- ent settings can be made.

With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function RADIO,

MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM14 other sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, naviga- tion* and park assist camera*.

For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.

Overview

Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the mar- ket.

Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement (Sensus Navigation).

Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Internet-connected car - *, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Climate control system (p. 126).

Park assist camera* (p. 265) CAM*.

14 Applies to certain car models.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 81

Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted.

NOTE

For cars with the keyless start and lock sys- tem* the remote control key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on the keyless start and lock system, see Keyless drive* (p. 173).

Insert the remote control key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key with

the detachable key blade and insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.

2. Then press the remote control key in the ignition switch up to its end position.

IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - hold the end with the detacha- ble key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).

Remove the remote control key Grip the remote control key and pull it out from the ignition switch.

Key positions - functions at different levels To enable the use of a limited number of func- tions with the engine switched off, the car's elec- trical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. This owner's manual describes these levels throughout using the denomination "key positions".

The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.82

Level Functions

0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.

Electrically operated seats can be adjusted.

The audio system can be used for a limited time - see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

I Sunroof, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compart- ment, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

II The headlamps come on.

Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.

Several other systems are acti- vated. However, electric heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after starting the engine.

This key position consumes a lot of current from the starter battery and should therefore be avoided!

Selecting key position/level Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This

means that the car's electrical system is at level 0.

NOTE

To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.

Key position I - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15 - Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

Key position II - With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch15 - Give a long16 press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Back to key position 0 - To return to key position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

Audio system For information on audio system functions with remote control key removed, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/stopping the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 276).

Towing For important information about the remote con- trol key during towing, see Towing (p. 324).

Related information Key positions (p. 81)

15 Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*. 16 Approx. 2 seconds.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 83

Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing position.

Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down.

Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.

Change the lumbar support*, press the but- ton.

Control panel for power seat*, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84).

WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Lowering the passenger seat backrest*17

The passenger seat's backrest can be folded for- ward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back/down as possible.

Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

WARNING Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Related information Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84)

Seats, rear (p. 85)

17 Only applies to comfort seats.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.84

Seats, front - electrically operated* The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/ down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle and lumbar support* can be changed.

Power seat

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Raise/lower seat

Seat, forward/backward

Backrest rake

Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and out- ward

The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this should happen, set the car's electrical system in key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/ inward/outward) can be made at a time.

Preparations The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjust- ment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.

Seat with memory function*

The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors.

Store setting Memory button

Memory button

Memory button

Button for storing settings

1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing but- ton 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the but- tons depressed until the acoustic signal is heard and text is shown in the combined instrument panel.

The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set.

The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is released, the movement of the seat and door mir- rors will be interrupted.

Key memory* in remote control key All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors18, see Remote control key - per- sonalisation* (p. 163).

18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and power retractable door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 85

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

WARNING Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped.

Heated seats For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p. 133) and Heated rear seat* (p. 134).

Related information Seats, front (p. 83)

Seats, rear (p. 85)

Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.

Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.

To lower the head restraint again, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down care- fully.

WARNING The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

86

Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward.

The head restraint is moved back manually until a "click" can be heard.

WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi- tion after being raised.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

The triple-section backrest can be folded in dif- ferent ways.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.

The left-hand section can be folded sepa- rately.

The centre section can be folded separately.

The right-hand section can only be folded together with the centre section.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 87

If the centre backrest is being lowered - release and adjust the head restraint for the centre backrest, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".

If the centre backrest is being lowered - release and adjust the head restraint for the centre backrest, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".

The outer head restraints are lowered auto- matically when the outer backrests are low- ered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle

while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch

shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE

When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints*

1. The remote control key must be in key posi- tion II.

2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING The head restraints must be in locked posi- tion after being raised.

Related information Seats, front (p. 83)

Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.88

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone con- trol.

Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel.

Lever - releasing the steering wheel

Possible steering wheel positions

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth:

1. The lever is pulled towards the driver to release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable steering force* (p. 190).

Keypads* and paddles*

Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.

Cruise control* (p. 198)* and Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)*.

Paddle for manual gear changing in an auto- matic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

Audio and phone control, see supplement, Sensus Infotainment.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 89

Horn

Horn.

Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.

Related information Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 89)

Heating* of the steering wheel The steering wheel can be heated with electric heating.

Function

Button position may vary depending on equipment selected and market.

Repeatedly press the button to switch between the following functions:

Function Indicator

Switched off Button lamp extinguished

Heating Button lamp illuminated

Automatic steering wheel heating With activated automatic start of steering wheel heating, the heating of the steering wheel starts when the engine is started. Automatic start takes place when the car is cold and the ambient tem-

perature is below approx. 10 C. Activate/deacti- vate the function in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.90

Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust display and instrument lighting and ambience lights (p. 100).

Overview, light switches.

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instru- ment lighting as well as ambience lights*

Button for rear fog lamp

Knob for lighting while driving and parking

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

A car with active xenon headlamps* has auto- matic headlamp levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.

Knob positions

NOTE

The same lamps are used for daytime running lights and front position lamps. The bright- ness is higher when the lamps are used as daytime running lights.

Position Specification

Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights, position lamps rear and side marker lamps when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Position lamps/side marker lamps when the car is parkedB.

Main beam flash can be used.

Position Specification

Daytime running lights, position lamps rear and side marker lamps in daylight when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running.

Dipped beam and position lamps/ side marker lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the rear fog lamp or windscreen wipers with continuous wiping are activated.

The tunnel detection (p. 93)* function is activated.

The Active main beam (p. 94)* function can be used.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam and position lamps/ side marker lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

A Fitted in or under the front bumper. B Also at idle when the engine is running, provided that the knob

is moved to this position from another position.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the car is driven.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

91

WARNING The car's audio system is not able to deter- mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- able for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Display and instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumb- wheel.

The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower beam alignment.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.

Only driver

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat

Occupants in all seats

Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area

The driver and maximum load in the cargo area

Related information Position lamps (p. 91)

Daytime running lights (p. 92)

Main/dipped beam (p. 93)

Position lamps Position lamps are switched on using the head- lamp control's knob.

Knob for headlamp control in the position for position lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front posi- tion lamps.

When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.

When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

92

exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on and Reset light switch position is shown in the combined instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a

mode other than .

Related information Light switches (p. 90)

Daytime running lights With the knob for headlamp control in position, and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the daytime running lights are activated automatically in day- light.

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automati- cally when the car is driven in daylight. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place

when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamp are activated.

WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- ance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 93)

Light switches (p. 90)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 93

Tunnel detection* Tunnel detection changes the lighting from day- time running lights to dipped beam when the car is driven into a tunnel.

The tunnel detection function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel within this time period then dipped beam is kept switched on. This avoids repeated changes to the car's light- ing.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must

remain in position for tunnel detection to work.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 93)

Light switches (p. 90)

Main/dipped beam With the knob for headlamp control in position

and the car's electrical system in key posi- tion II or the engine running, the dipped beam is activated automatically in poor light conditions.

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.

Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam With the knob in position, dipped beam is activated automatically at twilight or when day- light becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also activated automatically if the windscreen wipers or the rear fog lamps are activated.

With the knob in position dipped beam is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the knob is in

position 19 or . Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Alternatively, the main beam can be deactivated by a light press of the stalk switch toward the steering wheel.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel.

Auxiliary lamps* If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose whether they should be deactivated or switched on/off simultaneously with the main beam20, see MY CAR (p. 115).

19 When dipped beam is switched on. 20 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.94

Related information Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 96)

Active main beam* (p. 94)

Light switches (p. 90)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 97)

Tunnel detection* (p. 93)

Active main beam* Active main beam function detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns to main beam when the incoming light has stop- ped.

Active main beam - AHB Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen- sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or vehicles ahead.

Car with halogen headlamps

The lighting returns to main beam about a sec- ond after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Car with active Xenon headlamps

If the active main beam has the on/off functional- ity21 then the lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer

detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

If the active main beam has adaptive functional- ity21 then, unlike what happens during conven- tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu- minate with main beam on both sides of oncom- ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle.

The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

21 Depending on the car's equipment level.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

95

Activating/deactivating AHB can be activated when the headlamp con-

trol's knob is in position (provided that the function has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115)).

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (12 mph) or higher.

Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam.

Car with analogue combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol illumi- nates in the instrument's information display.

When main beam is switched on the sym- bol also illuminates in the combined instrument panel. This also applies for active Xenon head- lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the symbol turns white in the instrument's information display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol turns blue. This also applies for active Xenon head- lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam.

Manual operation

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.

If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is shown in the combined instrument panel's information display then you have to switch manually between main and dipped beam. However, the knob for head-

lamp control can still remain in position . The same applies if the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual and the

symbol are shown. The symbol goes out when these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situa- tions with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sen- sors are no longer blocked, the message extin-

guishes and the symbol illuminates.

WARNING AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for man- ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- ditions so require.

IMPORTANT

Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.96

In heavy rain or dense fog

In freezing rain

In snow flurries or slush

In moonlight

When driving in poorly lit built-up areas

When the traffic ahead has weak lighting

If there are pedestrians on or beside the road

If there are highly reflective objects such as signs in the vicinity of the road

When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier

When there is traffic on connecting roads

On the brow of a hill or in a hollow

In sharp bends.

For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 236).

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 93)

Light switches (p. 90)

Active Xenon headlamps* Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights - ABL

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

If the car is equipped with active xenon head- lamps/active bending lights (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deac-

tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115)). In the event of a fault in the func-

tion the symbol illuminates in the com- bined instrument panel at the same time as the information display shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.

Symbol Message Specification

Headlamp system malfunction Service required

The system is dis- engaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.

The function22 can be deactivated/activated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

22 Activated on delivery from the factory.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 97

Cornering lights* Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights with Automatic main beam function with adaptive functionality are equipped with cornering lights. The cornering lights temporarily illuminate the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators.

The function is activated when main beam or dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).

In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.

Related information Main/dipped beam (p. 93)

Active main beam* (p. 94)

Light switches (p. 90)

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps and has the Active main beam function then the headlamp pattern must be reset when changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice versa.

Active Xenon headlamps* No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is neces- sary for cars without the Active main beam* func- tion. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Adjustment of the headlamp pattern is required for cars with Active main beam. The car must be stationary with the engine running when the headlamp pattern is shifted between right and left-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Halogen headlamps No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is neces- sary. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Rear fog lamp When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users can detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in position

or .

Press the button for On/Off. The indicator sym-

bol in the combined instrument panel and the light in the button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed or when the headlamp control's knob

is turned to position or .

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

98

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Light switches (p. 90)

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 204), City Safety (p. 222) or Collision warning system (p. 229) brakes the car.

Related information Foot brake - emergency brake lights and

automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indi- cator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the haz- ard warning flashers are used.

The hazard warning flashers are activated auto- matically when the car has been braked so sud- denly that the emergency brake lights have been activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain active when the car has stopped and are deacti- vated automatically when you start driving again; they can also be deactivated by pressing the but- ton.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

99

Related information direction indicators (p. 99)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)

direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 71).

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 98)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

100

Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is acti- vated/deactivated with the buttons in the con- trols above the front seats and the rear seat.

G 0 2 1 1 4 9

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Interior lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Rear roof lighting

G 0 2 1 1 5 0

Rear roof lighting.

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.

Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- tively when the lid is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 153) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Automatic lighting The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the passen- ger compartment:

Off right-hand side pressed in, automatic lighting deactivated.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated.

On left-hand side pressed in, passenger compartment lighting switched on.

Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see Remote control key -

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 101

functions (p. 166) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 170)

the engine has been switched off and the car's electrical system is in key position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked.

The passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off automati- cally after two minutes.

Ambience lights* When the normal passenger compartment light- ing is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and enhance the mood while driving. The light also makes it easier to see objects in storage com- partments etc. during the darker hours of the day. This lighting goes out for a little while after the normal passenger compartment lighting when the car is locked. The brightness is controlled using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 90).

Home safe lighting Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, num- ber plate lighting.

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 93).

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, dipped beam, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors and number plate lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the home safe light- ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Approach lighting (p. 101)

Approach lighting Approach lighting consists of position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.

Approach lighting is switched on with the remote control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 166), and is used to switch on the car's light- ing at a distance.

When the function is activated with the remote control key, position lamps, lamps in the door mir- rors, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

The length of time for which the approach light- ing should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Home safe lighting (p. 101)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.102

Wipers and washers Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.

Windscreen wipers23

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.

Rain sensor, On/Off

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter- mittent wiping is selected.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear win- dow) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash (p. 397) and Wiper blades (p. 374).

Rain sensor* The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumb- wheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol

is shown in the combined instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-

sor button . The windscreen wipers make one sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- ity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra

23 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 374). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 376).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 103

sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button or move the stalk switch down to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the igni- tion switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.

Washing the headlamps and windows

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing* High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instru- ment panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to pri- oritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.

Wiping and washing the rear window

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping

Rear window wiper continuous speed

Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.104

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped with over- heating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling- down period.

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip- ers are on initiates intermittent rear window wip- ing24. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

If the rear window wiper is already on at continu- ous speed, no change is made.

NOTE

On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 376)

Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their respec- tive power window.

Driver's door control panel.

Electric child safety locks that prevent chil- dren from being able to open the rear doors from inside* and open/close the rear win- dows, see Child safety locks - electrical acti- vation* (p. 184).

Controls for rear windows

Controls for front windows

WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.

WARNING Check that no children or other passengers are trapped if/when the windows are closed using the remote control key.

WARNING If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

24 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

105

Operating

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto

Operating with auto

All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time.

In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 81). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened.

Closing of the windows is stopped and the win- dow is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing inter- ruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button pulled up.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs auto- matically to its end position.

Operating with the remote control key or central locking button To operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key, or from inside with the central locking button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 166) or Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179).

Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.

1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second.

WARNING A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.106

Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.

Controls for door mirrors.

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-

ror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

WARNING Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to pro- vide optimal vision. Objects may appear fur- ther away than they actually are.

Storing settings25

The settings for the door mirrors and the posi- tions of the driver's seat can be stored for each remote control key in the car key memory*, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 163).

Angling the door mirror when parking25

The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

Automatic angling of the door mirror when parking25

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for exam- ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror

automatically returns to its original position after a short time.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly:

1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.

2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- tons.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Automatic dimming* For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function requires that the interior rearview mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108).

25 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 107

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- cally stop in the fully extended position.

Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 101) or home safe lighting (p. 101) is selected.

Related information Rearview mirror - interior (p. 108)

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 107)

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating The defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors

Heating, windscreen

Heating, rear window and door mirrors

The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and door mir- rors.

One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load

the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automatically after a certain time.

See also Demisting and defrosting the wind- screen (p. 136).

The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/ defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than +7 C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function, the heated windscreen is demisted/defrosted automatically if the ambient temperature is lower than +5 C and automatic defrosting has been selected in the menu system MY CAR.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.108

Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.

Control for dimming

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim- ming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting:

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal position by moving the con- trol towards the windscreen.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with auto- matic dimming.

The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing - that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sen- sors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.

Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can be equipped with compass (p. 108).

Related information Door mirrors (p. 106)

Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir- ror contains a display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Operation

Rearview mirror with compass.

Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the underside of the mirror using a paper clip for example.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 109

Calibration The compass may need calibrating to show the correct compass direction.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE

Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri- cal equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear- view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

Magnetic zones.

4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the com- pass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the under- side of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown.

6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc- tion is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char- acter C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated, see Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 136).

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.110

Sunroof* The sunroof is operated with the control in the roof.

The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed man- ually.

The sunroof has a wind deflector.

The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or II is required for the sunroof to be opened.

Horizontal opening

G 0 1 7 8 2 3

Horizontal opening, backward/forward.

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening To open the sunroof to comfort position26, press the control back to the position for automatic opening and release. To fully open the sunroof, press the control back to the position for auto- matic opening again and release.

Open manually by pressing the control back- wards to the point of resistance for manual open- ing. The sunroof moves to comfort position26

while the control is being pressed backwards. To fully open the sunroof, press the control back- wards again.

Closing Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual closing. The sunroof moves to the closed position while the control is being pressed forwards.

WARNING Risk of crushing when the sunroof is closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not man- ual.

Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing and then release it.

The power supply to the sunroof is switched off by selecting key position 0 and removing the remote control key from the ignition switch.

WARNING If there are children in the car:

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by selecting key posi- tion 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - func- tions at different levels (p. 81).

26 Comfort position is an open position for the sunroof, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 111

Vertical opening

G 0 2 8 9 0 0

Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- trol upward.

Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.

Closing using the remote control key or central locking button

G 0 2 1 3 4 5

Remote control key Give one long press on the remote control

key's lock button until the sunroof and all the windows are closed and the doors and the tailgate are locked.

To interrupt closing, press the remote control key's lock button again.

Central locking button The central locking button in the driver's door or passenger door* can be used to close the sun- roof.

Give one long press on the central locking

button until the sunroof and all the win- dows are closed and the doors and the tail- gate are locked.

To interrupt closing, press the central locking button again.

WARNING If the sunroof is closed with the remote con- trol key or the central locking button, check that no one risks being trapped.

Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automati- cally when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the sunscreen forward to close it.

Pinch protection The sunroof has a pinch protection function which is triggered if it is blocked by an object during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

112

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position.

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p. 113) shown on the information display in the com- bined instrument panel (p. 66). Which menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 81).

Display (analogue combined instrument panel) and con- trols for menu navigation.

Display (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

OK access to message list and message confirmation.

Thumbwheel browse between menu options.

RESET reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function.

If there is a message (p. 113) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.

Related information Messages - handling (p. 114)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 113

Menu overview - combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instru- ment panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 81).

Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car.

Analogue combined instrument panel Digital speed

Parking heater*

Additional heater*

TC options

Service status

Oil level27

Messages (##)28

Digital combined instrument panel Settings*

Themes

Contrast mode/Colour mode

Service status

Messages28

Oil level27

Parking heater*

Trip computer reset

Related information Analogue combined instrument panel - over-

view (p. 66)

Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 67)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112)

Messages When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of dam- age - consult a workshopB.

Stop engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of dam- age - consult a workshopB.

Service urgentA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

See manualA Read the owner's manual.

Book time for maintenance

Time to book regular service - contact a workshopB.

27 Certain engines. 28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.114

Message Specification

Time for reg- ular mainte- nance

Time for regular service - contact a workshopB. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade.

Maintenance overdue

If the service intervals are not followed then the war- ranty does not cover any damaged parts - contact a workshopB.

Transmission Oil change needed

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Transmission Reduced per- formance

The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clearsC.

If shown repeatedly - con- tact a workshopB.

Transmission hot Reduce speed

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.

Message Specification

Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe man- ner and contact a work- shopB.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tempo- rarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Low battery charge Power save mode

The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the battery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

Related information Messages - handling (p. 114)

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112)

Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 113) that are shown in the information display of the com- bined instrument panel.

When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears in the display at the same time. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified.

Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge a message. Scroll through mes- sages with the thumbwheel (p. 112).

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Related information Menu overview - combined instrument panel

(p. 113)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 115

MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.

Operation Navigation in the menus is carried out using but- tons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*.

Control panel in centre console and steering wheel key- pad. The figure is schematic - the number of functions

and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.

MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.

OK/MENU - press the button in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or store the selected function in the memory.

TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to scroll up/down through the menu options.

EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on the function the cursor is on when EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu level, one of the following may occur:

phone call is rejected

current function is interrupted

input characters are deleted

most recent selections are undone

leads up in the menu system.

A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to the highest menu level (main source menu).

Menu options and search paths For a description of the menu options and search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.116

Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calculates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving.

Trip computer content and appearance varies depending on whether the combined instrument panel is analogue or digital:

Trip computer - analogue combined instru- ment panel (p. 118)

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel (p. 121)

The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel's information display29.

Trip meter The trip computer has two trip meters and one odometer for the total mileage.

Average Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven heater* has been used.

Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to zero.

Instantaneous The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.

Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the display - see section "Change unit" (p. 116).

Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate dis- tance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.

No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".

In which case, refuel as soon as possible.

The calculation is based on the average fuel con- sumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philoso- phy (p. 22).

Digital speed display in another unit30

If the main instrument is graduated in mph, the equivalent digital speed is shown as km/h.

Change unit Distance and fuel unit can be changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 115).

NOTE

In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys- tem*.

29 The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant. 30 Only digital combined instrument panel and certain markets.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 117

Related information Trip computer - analogue combined instru-

ment panel (p. 118)

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel (p. 121)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

118

Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel

The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.

Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is automati- cally illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extin- guishes, after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip computer.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Controls

Information display and controls.

OK - opens the combined instrument panel's menu, confirms messages or menu selec- tions.

Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.

RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.

Trip comp. opt. Choose which trip computer should be shown:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the options and stop at the required heading.

The trip computer display in the combined instru- ment panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel Information

Trip meter T1 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Trip meter T2 and total dist. Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

* Option/accessory. 119

Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel Information

Distance to empty For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 116).

Fuel consumption Current consumption.

Average speed Long press on RESET resets Average speed.

No trip computer information. This option shows a blank display and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.

Resetting the trip computer 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip

computer heading to be reset: T1 and total dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed.

2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.

Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Functions in the combined instrument panel's menu The combined instrument panel's menu includes setting options for trip computer. Open the menu to check/adjust the functions in the table below.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Press OK.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after completed checking/adjustment.

Functions Information

Digital speed

km/h

mph

No display

Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel.

Parking heater*

DIRECT START

- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater* - timer (p. 142).

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.120

Functions Information

Additional heater*

Auto On

Off

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).

TC options

Distance to empty tank

Fuel consumption

Average speed

Trip meter T1 and total dist.

Trip meter T2 and total dist.

Here you can activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip computer. The symbols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" - others are grey and have no "tick".

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360).

Messages (##) For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 114).

A Certain engines.

Related information Trip computer (p. 116)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

}}

121

Trip computer - digital combined instrument panel

The information from the trip computer can be shown in the combined instrument panel and operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk switch and with the combined instrument panel's menu.

Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is automati- cally illuminated in connection with unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened then the instrument extin- guishes, after which either key position II or engine starting is required in order to operate the trip computer.

NOTE

If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.

Acknowledge the message by briefly pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

Controls

Three trip computer options can be displayed simultane- ously - one in each "window".

OK - opens the combined instrument panel's menu, confirms messages or menu selec- tions.

Thumbwheel - browses between menu options or trip computer options.

RESET - resets the current trip meter or goes back out of the menu structure.

Trip comp. opt. Choose which trip computer should be shown:

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the heading combinations.

3. Stop at the required combination for the con- stant display of this trip data in the combined instrument panel.

The trip computer display in the combined instru- ment panel can be shifted to another option at any time during the journey. One of the options means that no trip computer is shown.

Heading combinations Information

Average Trip meter T1 + Meter reading Average speed Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty tank Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

||

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

122

Heading combinations Information

Instantaneous Meter reading kmh<>mph kmh<>mph - see section Reverse digital speed display (p. 116).

No trip computer information. This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.

Resetting the trip computer

Trip meter 1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the head-

ing combination with the trip meter to be reset.

2. One long press on RESET resets the value for the selected heading.

Average speed and average consumption 1. Press OK to open the combined instrument

panel's menu.

2. Browse to the Trip computer reset menu option with the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

3. Choose to reset average consumption, aver- age speed or to reset both. Confirm the selection with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET.

Functions in the combined instrument panel's menu The combined instrument panel's menu includes setting options for trip computer. Open the menu to check/adjust the functions in the table below.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - reset them first with two presses on RESET.

2. Press OK.

3. Browse through the functions with the thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing twice on RESET after completed checking/adjustment.

Functions Information

Trip computer reset

Average

Average speed

Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.

Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.

Messages For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 114).

Themes Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 66).

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory. 123

Functions Information

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 146).

Contrast mode/Colour mode Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

Parking heater*

Direct start

- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 142).

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil levelA For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360).

A Certain engines.

Related information Trip computer (p. 116)

Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 124)

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

* Option/accessory.124

Trip computer - trip statistics* Trip statistics from the trip computer can be shown in the centre console's screen and pro- vide a graphic overview of fuel consumption.

Function Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 115)

and select Trip statistics in order to see the bar chart.

Trip statistics31

Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven dis- tance, depending on the scale selected - the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kil- ometre or 10 km.

Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor on the far right changes position between up and down in relation to the scale selected.

Settings Different settings can be made for trip statistics in the menu system MY CAR - Trip statistics.

Reset when vehicle has been off for minimum 4h - highlight the box by select- ing ENTER and go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all statistics are deleted automatically after fin- ishing driving and the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.

Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all previous statistics, go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall be started before 4 hours have elapsed then the current period must first be deleted man- ually with this option.

See also information on Eco guide (p. 70).

Related information Trip computer (p. 116)

31 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

CLIMATE CONTROL

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.126

General information on climate control The car is equipped with electronic climate con- trol (p. 132). The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

NOTE

Air conditioning (AC) (p. 136) can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart- ment, and to prevent the windows from mist- ing, it should always be switched on.

To bear in mind To ensure that the air conditioning works

optimally, the side windows, and sunroof* should be closed.

Global opening (p. 180) opens/closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Remove ice and snow from the climate con- trol system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full acceleration, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be

a temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.

Remove misting on the insides of the win- dows primarily by using the defroster func- tion (p. 136). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.

Cars with Start/Stop* With an auto-stopped (p. 290) engine certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 134).

Cars with ECO* Certain equipment may have its function tempo- rarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO (p. 298) function is activated, e.g. the air condi- tioning (p. 136).

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- tings can be reset manually, but full function- ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.

Related information Actual temperature (p. 127)

Menu settings - climate control (p. 129)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 129)

Air quality (p. 127)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 127

Actual temperature The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physical expe- rience with reference to factors such as ambient temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radia- tion etc. in and around the car at the time.

The system includes a sun sensor (p. 127) which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left- hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Temperature control in the passenger com- partment (p. 135)

Sensors - climate control The climate control system has a number of sen- sors to help control the temperature (p. 127) in the car.

The sun sensor is located on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located in the door mirror.

The humidity sensor* is located by the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth- ing or other objects.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air quality The interior in a passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Passenger compartment filter (p. 128)

Material in the passenger compartment (p. 129)

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p. 128)*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 128)*

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.128

Air quality - passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.

The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- ommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- ter is fitted.

Related information Air quality (p. 127)

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- senger compartment with fresh air. The func- tion starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The air quality system IAQS (p. 128) is a fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air quality (p. 127)

Air quality - IAQS* The air quality system IAQS separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment.

If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger com- partment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

In the event of misting, the air quality sensor should be disengaged, and the defroster functions for the windscreen and side win- dows, as well as the rear window, should be used.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air quality (p. 127)

Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 128)

CLIMATE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 129

Air quality - material Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 400).

Related information Air quality (p. 127)

Menu settings - climate control It is possible to activate/deactivate or change the default settings for six of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.

Fan level during automatic climate control (p. 135).

Recirculation timer (p. 137).

Automatic start of rear window defroster (p. 107)1.

Interior air quality system* (p. 128).

Automatic start of seat heating driver (p. 133).

Automatic start of steering wheel heating (p. 89).

More information is available in the description of the menu system (p. 115).

The climate control system's functions can be reset in the menu system MY CAR to the default settings. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode.

If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 138).

1 Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function, the heated windscreen is also demisted/defrosted automatically if the setting for rear window defroster is activated.

||

CLIMATE CONTROL

130

Air vents in the dashboard

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting.

Air vents in the door pillars

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.

Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather.

NOTE

Remember that small children may be sensi- tive to air flows and draughts.

Air distribution

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - ventilation floor

The figure consists of three buttons. When press- ing the buttons the corresponding figure is illumi- nated in the screen (see following figure) and an arrow in front of each part of the figure shows the air distribution that is selected. For more information, see the air distribution table (p. 138).

CLIMATE CONTROL

131

The selected air distribution is shown in the centre con- sole display screen.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Auto-regulation (p. 135)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.132

Electronic climate control - ECC ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger compart-

ment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.

The auto function is used to automatically con- trol temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.

Temperature control (p. 135), left-hand side

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), left side

Heated windscreen* and max. defroster (p. 136)

Fan (p. 134)

Air distribution (p. 129) - ventilation floor

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 107)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 133), right side

Temperature control (p. 135), right-hand side

Recirculation (p. 137)

ECO* (p. 298)

AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 135)

AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 136)

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 133

Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passenger when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the func- tion.

There are three heat levels that give different heating outputs:

Highest heat level - three orange fields illu- minate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).

Lower heat level - two orange fields illumi- nate in the screen.

Lowest heat level - one orange field illumi- nates in the screen.

Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.

WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Automatic start of driver's seat heating With the automatic start of the driver's seat heat- ing activated, the driver's seat will have the high- est heat level when the engine is started.

Automatic start takes place when the car is cold and the ambient temperature is lower than approx. +10 C.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Heated rear seat* (p. 134)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.134

Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's2 outer positions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps.

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the function.

There are three heat levels that give different heating outputs:

Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.

Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.

Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.

Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Heated front seats* (p. 133)

Fan The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.

NOTE

If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- ditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.

Fan knob Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO is selected, then the fan speed is regulated automatically (p. 135) - the fan speed previ- ously set is disengaged.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)

2 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 51).

CLIMATE CONTROL

135

Auto-regulation The auto function automatically regulates tem- perature (p. 135), air conditioning (p. 136), fan speed (p. 134), recirculation (p. 137) and air distribution (p. 129).

If you select one or more man- ual functions, the other func- tions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual set- tings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen shows AUTO

CLIMATE.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Temperature control in the passenger compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem- perature setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.

The temperature can be adjusted with the knob - sepa- rately for the driver's side and the passenger side.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Actual temperature (p. 127)

Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 132)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.136

Air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

When the lamp in the AC but- ton illuminates, the air condi- tioning is controlled by the sys- tem's automatic function.

When the lamp in the AC but- ton is switched off the air con-

ditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still controlled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 136) is activated, the air conditioning is switched on automatically so that the air is dehumidified at the maximum setting.

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.

The selected setting is shown in the centre console's screen.

Heated windscreen*

Max. defroster

The light in the defroster but- ton illuminates when the func- tion is active.

Press the button repeatedly to change between the different levels or to deactivate the func-

tion.

For cars without heated windscreen there is one defrost level:

Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illumi- nates in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

For cars with heated windscreen there are two defrost levels:

Start the heating for the windscreen3 - sym- bol (1) illuminates in the screen.

Start the heating for the windscreen3 and air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.

Switch off the function - no symbol illumi- nates.

NOTE

Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 20) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

3 If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 108)* must be recalibrated.

CLIMATE CONTROL

137

NOTE

Electrically heated windscreen is not available when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 290).

The following also takes place when the max. defroster function is active in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:

the air conditioning is automatically engaged

recirculation and the air quality system are automatically disengaged.

NOTE

The noise level increases as the fan is operat- ing at max.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.

When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air.

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

NOTE

When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air distribution in the passenger compart- ment (p. 129)

Air distribution - table (p. 138)

CLIMATE CONTROL

138

Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribution (p. 129) of the air.

Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recircula- ted. Air conditioning is always engaged.

to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this the fan level must not be too low).

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents. to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents. to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

CLIMATE CONTROL

139

Air distribution Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents. in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows. to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor. to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warm- ing upwards in cold weather.

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

Air distribution - recirculation (p. 137)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.140

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the jour- ney are reduced.

The heater can be started directly (p. 141) or with a timer (p. 142).

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- ture exceeds 15 C. The heater's maximum run- ning time is 50 minutes.

WARNING Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.

NOTE

When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before star- ting to refuel.

Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off

automatically and a message appears on the information display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 112) OK but- ton once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the heater combined with short journeys leads to the battery discharg- ing and consequential starting problems.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. The heater is used for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - messages (p. 144)

Additional heater* (p. 146)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 141

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be started directly.

Direct start can be performed via:

information display

remote control key*

mobile*.

Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- senger compartment heater (p. 140), it will run for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the heater is running.

Direct start via the information display 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start in order to activate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Direct start via the remote control key*

Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.

The engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater can be activated via the remote con- trol key:

Hold the button for approach lighting depressed for 2 seconds.

Hazard warning flashers provide information in accordance with the following:

5 short flashes followed by a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal has reached the car and the heater has been activated.

5 short flashes - the signal has reached the car but the heater has not been acti- vated.

Hazard warning flashers remain switched off - the signal has not reached the car.

If the button for information is depressed when the heater is active then the indicator lamp will show the status for this - at the same time the car's lock status (p. 167) is shown. While the status is being investigated the indicator lamp emits a pair of short flashes followed by a con- stant glow if the heater is active.

Status is also shown in the trip computer during heating.

Direct start via app* Activation and information on selected settings are available via the Volvo On Call* app.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - timer (p. 142)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - immediate stop (p. 142)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - messages (p. 144)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.142

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop The engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater can be deactivated directly via the information display.

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in order to deactivate the heater and select with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - direct start (p. 141)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - timer (p. 142)

Engine block heater and passenger compart- ment heater* - messages (p. 144)

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer The timer of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 140) is connected to the car's clock.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

Adjusting4

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 112) to scroll to one of the timers Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours set- ting.

5. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing minutes setting.

7. Select the required minute using the thumb- wheel.

8. Press OK5 to confirm the setting.

9. Go back in the menu structure using RESET.

10. Select the other time (continue from step 2) or exit the menu with RESET.

Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.

4. Exit the menu with RESET.

Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off man- ually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:

1. Press OK to access the menu.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

> If a timer is set but not activated then a clock icon is shown beside the set time.

4 Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off. 5 Press OK again to activate the timer.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 143

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

4. Deactivate the timer as follows:

long press on OK or

short press on OK to continue in the menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 142).

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* - messages (p. 144)

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.144

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and display messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 140) differ depending on whether the combined instrument panel (p. 66) is analogue or digital.

When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.

When one of the timers has been activated, the symbol for activated timer illuminates in the dis- play at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.

Symbol for activated timer in analogue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel.

The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.

Symbol Message Specification

The heater is switched on and running.

Fuel operated heater stopped Bat- tery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

CLIMATE CONTROL

145

Symbol Message Specification

Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level

Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service required

Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 112) OK button.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.146

Additional heater* In cold climate zones6 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating tem- perature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment.

A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 146) is fitted in cars with diesel engines.

In a semi-cold6 climate zone diesel-driven cars have an electric additional heater (p. 147) instead of a fuel-driven version.

Cars with certain petrol engines7 have an electric additional heater integrated into the car's climate control system.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* (p. 140)

Fuel-driven additional heater* The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 147) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 146).

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven addi- tional heater should be switched off for short distances.

1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi- tion I (p. 81).

2. Press OK to access the menu.

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heater8 or Settings9 and select with OK.

4. Select one of the options ON or OFF using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.

5. Exit the menu with RESET.

NOTE

The menu options are only visible in key posi- tion I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.

Passenger compartment heater* If the additional heater is supplemented with a timer function then it can be used as a passen- ger compartment heater (p. 140).

6 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 7 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned. 8 Analogue combined instrument panel. 9 Digital combined instrument panel.

CLIMATE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 147

Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 146) or an electric additional heater (p. 146).

The heater cannot be controlled manually, but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside temperatures below 14 C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.

Related information Engine block heater and passenger compart-

ment heater* (p. 140)

LOADING AND STORAGE

LOADING AND STORAGE

150

Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 151

Storage compartment in door panel

Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions

Ticket clip

Glovebox (p. 152)

Storage compartment

Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 152)

Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat

Storage pocket

WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compart- ments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.152

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 152) are specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 153) for the front seat, and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 150)

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ash- tray* (p. 152)

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 153) for the front seat.

The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 152) is detached by lifting the tray straight up.

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Related information Storage spaces (p. 150)

Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

The owner's manual and maps can be kept in here for example. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be locked* (p. 181) using the key blade (p. 169).

Related information Storage spaces (p. 150)

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 153

Inlaid mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.

WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

Related information Cleaning the interior (p. 400)

Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.

Vanity mirror with lighting.

The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted.

Related information Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting

(p. 372)

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next to

the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel console.

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.

1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.154

The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 81).

WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking heater is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the bat- tery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be con- nected to the other one.

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture repair (p. 345) has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ash-

tray* (p. 152)

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p. 157)

Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor- responding weight.

For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 410).

The tailgate is opened via a button on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate

(p. 181).

WARNING The cars driving properties change depend- ing on the weight and positioning of the load.

To bear in mind when loading Position the load firmly against the rear

seat's backrest.

Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see WHIPS - seating position (p. 40).

Centre the load.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low- ered backrests.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory. 155

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weigh- ing 1000 kg.

WARNING The protection provided by the inflatable cur- tain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.

Never load cargo above the backrest.

WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft.

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

Related information Load retaining eyelets (p. 156)

Safety net* (p. 157)

Loading - long load (p. 155)

Roof load (p. 156)

Loading - long load To simplify loading (p. 154) in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The

passenger seat2 backrest can also be folded* for an extra long load.

Lowering the rear seat backrest If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered, see Seats, rear (p. 85).

2 Only applies to comfort seats.

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.156

Roof load The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.

Carefully follow the installation instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carri- ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving charac- teristics are altered by roof loads.

For information about the maximum permitted load on the roof, including load carriers and any space box, see Weights (p. 410).

Related information Loading (p. 154)

Load retaining eyelets The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

WARNING Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro- trude may cause injury under violent braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Related information Loading (p. 154)

Loading - bag holder* The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.

1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor hatch.

2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks.

Related information Loading (p. 154)

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 157

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens, music players and mobile phones.

Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.

The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.

IMPORTANT

Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).

NOTE

Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's starter battery.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emer- gency puncture repair (TMK), see Emergency puncture repair (p. 345).

Related information Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 153)

Safety net*3

A safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

Attaching

For safety reasons, the safety net must always be correctly fastened and secured.

The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car:

Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest

Front fitting - Behind the front seat back- rests.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

* Option/accessory.158

WARNING Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fit- ted safety net.

Rear fitting 1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the

safety net's storage pockets are turned backwards.

2. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into the rear roof mounting.

Hook the net's other retaining hook into the roof mounting on the opposite side.

Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.

3. Hook the hook into the load retaining eyelets on both sides and tension the cam lock by pressing down the tongue and tensioning the strap.

Front fitting 1. Fold out the safety net. Make sure that the

safety net's storage pockets are turned backwards.

2. Place the seats as far forward as possible.

3. Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into the front roof mounting.

Hook the net's other retaining hook into the roof mounting on the opposite side.

Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.

4. Hook the hook into the eyelet on the seat rail on both sides and tension the cam lock by pressing down the tongue and tensioning the strap.

Related information Loading (p. 154)

Safety grille* (p. 159)

3 Standard in certain markets.

LOADING AND STORAGE

}}

* Option/accessory. 159

Safety grille* A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back/up.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.

Fitting/removal The safety grille is normally permanently installed in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer

cargo area is required. However, if desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and removed from the car.

For information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions4 that were included with the initial purchase.

For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be correctly fastened and secured when being refitted.

Related information Safety net* (p. 157)

Loading (p. 154)

Load retaining eyelets (p. 156)

Cargo cover*5

Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.

IMPORTANT

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted.

Attaching the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel.

Move the other end piece into the corres- ponding recess.

4 Installation instructions no. 30756681.

||

LOADING AND STORAGE

160

Press both sides in. A "click" should be audi- ble and the red marking should disappear.

> Check that both end pieces are locked.

Removing the cargo cover 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out.

2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the other end piece loosens automatically.

Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing disc In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted.

Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from its support shelves, and lower.

Related information Loading (p. 154)

Loading - long load (p. 155)

5 Standard in certain markets.

LOCKS AND ALARM

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.162

Remote control key Amongst other things, the remote control key is used for locking/unlocking and starting the engine.

There are two variants of remote control key - Remote control key in basic version and Remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator)*.

Functionality BasicA with

PCCB

Locking/unlocking and detachable key blade

x x

Keyless locking/unlock- ing

x

Keyless engine starting x

Information button and indicator lamps

x

A 5-button key B 6-button key

Remote control key with PCC has extended func- tionality compared with the remote control key in the basic version - e.g. support for keyless star- ting and locking/unlocking (Keyless Drive (p. 173)) as well as certain unique functions (p. 167).

All remote control keys have a detachable key blade (p. 169) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys.

More remote control keys can be ordered - but not variants other than the one supplied with the car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used for one single car.

The car is supplied with two remote control keys.

WARNING If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

Remote control key - losing If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 163

Remote control key - personalisation* The key memory in the remote control key (p. 162) means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different people.

The key memory function is available in combina- tion with, for example, power* driver's seat.

Settings for door mirrors (p. 106), driver's seat, steering force (p. 190) and the combined instru- ment panel's theme, contrast and colour mode (p. 67) can be stored in the memory, depending on the car's equipment level.

The function1 can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

When the function is activated, the settings are automatically linked to the key memory. This means that a change in a setting will automati- cally be saved to the specific remote control key's memory.

Storing settings Proceed as follows in order to store the settings and use the key memory in the remote control key:

1. Unlock the car with the remote control key in whose memory the setting2 shall be stored.

2. Make sure that the key memory function is activated in the menu system MY CAR.

3. Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat and the door mirrors.

4. The settings are stored in the current remote control key's memory.

The next time the car is unlocked with the same remote control key, the positions that are stored in the key memory will be set automatically - pro- viding that they have been changed since the last time the current remote control key was used.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

WARNING Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Make sure that none of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger of becoming trapped.

Changing settings If several people each with a remote control key approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat and door mirrors are implemented for the person whose remote control key unlocks the driver's door.

If the driver's door has been opened by person A with remote control key A, but person B with remote control key B shall drive, then the settings can be changed as follows:

Standing by the driver's door, or sitting behind the steering wheel, person B presses the button for unlocking on his/her remote control key, see Remote control key - func- tions (p. 166).

Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84).

Adjust seat and door mirrors manually, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 84) and Door mirrors (p. 106).

1 Called Car key memory in MY CAR. 2 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.164

Reactivation of settings When the car is locked or after 30 minutes if the car is left unlocked, the key memory will be deac- tivated and a standard driver profile will be set. To reactivate the key memory for the current remote control key, the following is required.

For cars without keyless start and lock system The settings that are stored in the key memory are activated if the car is unlocked by pressing the remote control key's unlock button.

For cars with keyless start and lock system The key memory is activated if:

1. The car is unlocked either by pressing the remote control key's unlock button or via keyless unlocking.

2. If the car is unlocked, a key scan is made when the driver's door is opened. If a unique remote control key is found, its stored set- tings will be activated. If the car is locked, see the previous point.

Related information Remote control key with PCC* - unique func-

tions (p. 167)

Locking/unlocking - indicator When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 162) the direction indica- tors confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.

Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are folded3 in.

Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded3 out.

After locking the indication is only given if all locks are activated once the doors have been closed.

Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Lock indicator (p. 164)

Alarm indicator* (p. 186)

Lock indicator A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.

Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 186).

NOTE

Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.

Related information Locking/unlocking - indicator (p. 164)

3 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 165

Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car.

Each remote control key (p. 162) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code.

The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:

Message Specification

Insert car key

Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt.

Car key not found

Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to start again.

If the error persists: Insert the remote key into the ignition switch and try to start again.

Immobi- liser Try to start again

Error in immobiliser system dur- ing starting. If the error persists: Contact a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

For starting the car, see Starting the engine (p. 276).

Related information Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking

system* (p. 165)

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system* Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking sys-

tem4 makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.

Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more infor- mation and assistance with activating the system.

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Immobiliser (p. 165)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.166

Remote control key - functions The remote control key in basic version has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.

Functions

Remote control key in basic version.

Locking

Unlocking

Approach light duration

Tailgate

Panic function

Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car Communicator).

Information

Function buttons Locking Locks the doors and tailgate

while the alarm is activated.

Press and hold to close all the windows and sun- roof* simultaneously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 180).

WARNING If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

Press and hold to open all windows simultane- ously. For more information, see Global opening (p. 180).

The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button - within ten seconds - unlocking the remaining doors.

The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Approach light duration Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For more infor- mation, see Approach lighting (p. 101).

Tailgate (p. 181) - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only.

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency.

Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 sec- onds. Otherwise the function switches off auto- matically after approx. 3 minutes.

4 Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 167

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Remote control key with PCC* - unique func- tions (p. 167)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 178)

Remote control key - range Remote control key functions (in its basic ver- sion) have a range of approx. 20 metres from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade (p. 170).

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 81) is active, and all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information dis- play in the combined instrument panel and a short audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.

The message extinguishes when the remote con- trol key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the OK button, or when all doors are closed.

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions A remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator) has enhanced functionality com- pared with a remote control key in basic version (p. 162) in the form of an information button and indicator lamps.

Remote control key with PCC.

Information button

Indicator lamps

Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the indicator lamps.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.168

Using the information button Press the information button .

> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the remote control key. This indicates that information from the car is being scanned.

If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is inter- rupted.

NOTE

If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked.

Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.

Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps The alarm was triggered less than 5 minutes ago.

Related information Remote control key with PCC* - range

(p. 168)

Remote control key with PCC* - range The range of a remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator) for locking, unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20 metres from the car - the other functions are up to approx. 100 metres.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Outside the remote control key's range If the remote control key is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light in the indicator lamps travelling around on the remote control key.

If several remote control keys are used for the car then it is only the one last used for locking/ unlocking that shows the correct status.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 169

NOTE

If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last communication between the remote control key and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Related information Keyless Drive* - remote control key range

(p. 174)

Remote control key - range (p. 167)

Detachable key blade A remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.

The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom- mended when ordering new key blades.

Key blade functions Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the left-hand front door is unlocked manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 170).

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated (p. 184).

the right-hand front door and the rear doors can be locked manually (p. 178), e.g. in the event of power failure.

access to the glovebox and cargo area (pri- vacy locking (p. 171)*) can be blocked.

the airbag for front passenger seat (PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated (p. 36).

Related information Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

Remote control key (p. 162)

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 169) is carried out as follows:

Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the remote control key (p. 162).

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.170

Related information Detachable key blade - unlocking doors

(p. 170)

Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 184)

Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating* (p. 36)

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade (p. 169) can be used if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key (p. 162), e.g. if the key's bat- tery has run out.

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged - then the left-hand front door is unlocked as follows:

1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For illustration and more information, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 176).

NOTE

When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered.

2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.

For cars with keyless start and lock system, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 176).

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Remote control key - replacing the battery (p. 172)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 171

Privacy locking* Privacy locking is intended for when the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or simi- lar. The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected from the central locking - the tailgate cannot be opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control key (p. 162).

G 0 1 7 8 6 9

Active locks for remote control key with key blade.

G 0 1 7 8 7 0

Active locks for remote control key, without key blade and privacy locking activated.

This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/deactivate the alarm (p. 185), to unlock the doors and to start the car.

The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff - the loose key blade is retained by the car owner.

NOTE

Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover (p. 159) over the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

Activate/deactivate

Activating privacy locking.

To activate privacy locking:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl- inder.

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key blade. The combined instru- ment panel's information display shows a message at the same time.

The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button.

LOCKS AND ALARM

172

NOTE

Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key, but keep it in a safe place instead.

Deactivation takes place in reverse order.

For information on locking the glovebox only, see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 181).

Remote control key - replacing the battery The battery5 for the remote control key may need to be replaced.

The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if:

the information symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and the display shows Car key battery low See manual

and/or

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.

Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.

Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.

5 Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 173

NOTE

Turn the remote control key over with the but- tons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.

Remote control key (one battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery.

2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.

Remote control key with PCC* (two batteries) 1. Carefully prize out the batteries.

2. First install one new one with the (+) side up.

3. Position the white plastic tab in between and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.

Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key, two in the remote control key with PCC.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Remote control key - functions (p. 166)

Keyless drive* Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a star- ting and locking system that can be operated keylessly.

With the keyless start and lock system the car can be started, locked and unlocked without the remote control key (p. 162)6 inserted in the igni- tion switch. It is enough to have the remote con- trol key with you in a pocket. The system makes it easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car when your hands are full.

Both of the remote control keys included with the car have keyless functionality. It is possible to order more remote control keys.

The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 81) - with the remote control key.

Related information Keyless Drive* - remote control key range

(p. 174)

Keyless drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 174)

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote con- trol key function (p. 175)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.174

Keyless Drive* - remote control key range In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automati- cally without pressing a button on the remote

control key7, a remote control key must be within approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or tailgate.

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the remote control key is on the opposite side of the car.

The red rings in the above figure indicate the range covered by the system's antennas.

If all remote control keys are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I

or II (p. 81) is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the informa- tion display in the combined instrument panel and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same time.

When the remote control key has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:

a door has been opened and closed

the remote control key has been inserted in the ignition switch

The OK button has been pressed.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 177)

Keyless drive* - secure handling of the remote control key It is important to handle the car's remote control keys with great care.

If one of the remote control keys8 has been left in the car then the keyless functions are deacti- vated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other remote control key that belongs to the car. This prevents unauthorised entry.

The next time the car is unlocked with the other remote control key the forgotten remote control key is reactivated again.

IMPORTANT

Avoid leaving the remote control key with PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into your car and takes the remote control key, it will e.g. be possible to start the car by press- ing the remote control key in the ignition switch and then pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

6 Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC. 7 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 175

Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- fere with the remote control key's keyless func- tions (p. 173).

NOTE

Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and the key blade like a remote control key in basic version, see Remote control key - functions (p. 166).

Related information Remote control key - replacing the battery

(p. 172)

Keyless drive* - secure handling of the remote control key (p. 174)

Keyless Drive* - remote control key range (p. 174)

Keyless Drive* - locking Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys- tem have a touch-sensitive area on the outside handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate for locking/unlocking.

The touch-sensitive area on the outer door handles and the rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate.

Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long press on any of the door handles' touch-sensitive areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 164) in the windscreen confirms that locking has been completed by starting to flash.

All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.

NOTE

In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Alarm indicator* (p. 186)

8 Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.176

Keyless drive* - unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.

NOTE

The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand move- ment a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 175)

Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be unlocked with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the left-hand front door can be opened using the detachable key blade.

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also done with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize.

> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.

3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm* - remote control key not working (p. 187).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169)

Alarm* (p. 185)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 177

Keyless Drive* - lock settings Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless start and lock system can be adapted by indicat- ing in the menu system MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked.

For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Keyless Drive* - antenna location Cars equipped with keyless start and lock sys- tem have a number of built-in antennas posi- tioned at different locations in the car.

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless sys- tem's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pace- maker and the keyless system.

Related information Keyless drive* (p. 173)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.178

Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 162). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected, see Remote con- trol key - functions (p. 166).

In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate must be closed.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

WARNING Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls.

For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 183).

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see Alarm* (p. 185).)

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Keyless drive* (p. 173)

Manual locking of the door In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.

The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade, see Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 176).

Other doors do not have lock cylinders and instead have lock knobs on each door's end face which must be re-turned - then they are mechan- ically locked/blocked against opening from the outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.

Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks (p. 184).

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 179

The door is blocked against opening from the outside.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

NOTE

A door's knob control only locks that par- ticular door - not all doors simultaneously.

A manually locked rear door with an acti- vated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside, see Child safety locks - manual activation (p. 184). A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.

Related information Remote control key - replacing the battery

(p. 172)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central lock- ing button on the driver's door and passenger door*.

Central locking

Central locking.

Press one side of the button to lock -

the other side to unlock.

Press and hold the button to also open all side windows simultaneously*.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:

Press the central locking button .

A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also Global opening (p. 180)).

Pull the door handle and open the door - the door is unlocked and opened in one opera- tion.

Lamp in lock button Central locking is available in two variants - the lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door has different meanings dependent on the variant.

With central locking button only in the driver's door, other doors have no button:

Illuminated lamp means that all doors are locked.

With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door:

Illuminated lamp means that only that partic- ular door is locked. When all buttons are illu- minated all doors are locked.

Locking Press the central locking button - all

closed doors are locked.

A long press also closes all side windows and sunroof simultaneously (see also Global opening (p. 180)).

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.180

Lock button* rear doors

The button's lamp illuminates when the door is locked.

The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec- tive rear door.

To unlock the door:

Pull the door handle - the door is unlocked and opened.

Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the outside

(p. 178)

Alarm* (p. 185)

Remote control key - functions (p. 166) Global opening The global opening function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

Central locking button

A long press on the symbol in the central locking button or on the remote control key opens all side windows simultaneously. The

same procedure on the symbol closes all side windows simultaneously.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Power windows (p. 104)

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 181

Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 152) can only be locked/ unlocked using the remote control key's detach- able key blade.

For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).

Locking the glovebox:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cyl- inder in accordance with the illustration above.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.

For information on privacy locking, see Privacy locking* (p. 171).

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in several ways.

Manual opening

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.

To open:

1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.182

IMPORTANT

Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.

Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel.

Unlocking with the remote control key

The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the

remote control key's button.

The lock indicator (p. 164) on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and

movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

The doors remain locked and armed.

The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate.

If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

Unlocking the car from inside

Unlocking, tailgate

To unlock the tailgate:

Press the button (1) on the headlamp control panel.

> The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened within 2 minutes (if the car is locked from the inside).

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key's button for

locking , see Remote control key - func- tions (p. 166).

> The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been acti- vated.

Related information Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 178)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 183

Deadlocks* Deadlocks9 means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from both inside and outside.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote con- trol key (p. 162) and are set after an approx. ten seconds delay after the doors have been locked.

NOTE

If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key when the deadlocks function is acti- vated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 169). In addi- tion, it is possible to unlock and open the doors and tailgate on cars equipped with keyless start and lock system* by touching door handles or the handle on the tailgate.

WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with- out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

Temporary deactivation

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

MY CAR

OK MENU

TUNE knob control

EXIT

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

NOTE

Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

The above applies if the deadlocks have not been deactivated temporarily.

Related information Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade

(p. 176)

Remote control key (p. 162)

9 Only in combination with alarm.

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.184

Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside.

Activate/deactivate child safety locks

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man- ual door lock (p. 178).

The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 169) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the out- side and the inside.

WARNING Each rear door has two knob controls - do not mix up the child safety locks with manual door locks.

NOTE

A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.

Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock.

Related information Child safety locks - electrical activation*

(p. 184)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p. 178)

Child safety locks - electrical activation* Child safety locks with electrical activation pre- vent children from opening the rear doors or win- dows from the inside.

Activation The child safety locks can be activated/deacti- vated in all key positions (p. 81) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.

To activate the child safety locks:

Control panel driver's door.

1. Start the engine or choose a key position higher than 0.

LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 185

2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.

> The combined instrument panel's informa- tion display shows the message Rear child lock activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.

When the child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are acti- vated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.

Related information Child safety locks - manual activation

(p. 184)

Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)

Alarm* The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.

Activated alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened10

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*)

the starter battery's cable is disconnected

the siren is disconnected.

If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

NOTE

The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.

To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used - direct the air- flow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compart- ment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, see Reduced alarm level* (p. 187).

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insur- ance.

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.

Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock button.

10 Applies to certain markets.

||

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.186

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock button

or insert the remote control key in the igni- tion switch.

Related information Alarm indicator* (p. 186)

Alarm* - automatic re-arming (p. 186)

Alarm* - remote control key not working (p. 187)

Alarm indicator* The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 185) status.

Same LED as lock indicator (p. 164).

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit Alarm not armed

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- tion I is selected) Alarm has been trig- gered.

Alarm* - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 185) pre- vents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Related information Reduced alarm level* (p. 187)

LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 187

Alarm* - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 185) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 172) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade (p. 176).

> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator (p. 186) flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.

> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out.

3. Start the engine.

Alarm signals* When the alarm (p. 185) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.

A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level* Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm (p. 185) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry - tem- porarily deactivate the movement and tilt detec- tors.

The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 183)11.

Related information Alarm indicator* (p. 186)

LOCKS AND ALARM

188

Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard

Country/Area

EU, China

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)

Country/Area

EU

Korea

Country/Area

China

Hong Kong

Related information Remote control key (p. 162)

11 Only in combination with alarm.

DRIVER SUPPORT

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.190

Active chassis - Four C* Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.

Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle.

Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving. Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering.

Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces.

The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further mini- mised.

Operation

Control buttons.

The required chassis setting is selected using the centre console buttons. The setting used when the engine was switched off is re-activated when the engine is next started.

Adjustable steering force* Speed related power steering causes the steer- ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv- ity.

On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.

The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115):

Once there, search for Steering force level and select Low, Medium or High.

This setting is not accessible when the car is moving.

NOTE

In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be tempo- rarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be per- ceived to be slightly heavier.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer- ing assistance the combined instrument panel shows a message.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 191

Related information MY CAR (p. 115)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - general Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

The activation of the ESC system dur- ing braking may be noticed as a throb- bing sound. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

WARNING The stability system ESC is supplementary assistance - it cannot handle all situations in all road conditions.

The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

The ESC system consists of the following func- tions:

Active Yaw Control

Spin Control

Traction control system

Engine drag control - EDC

Corner Traction Control - CTC

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA

Active Yaw Control The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceler- ation.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.

Engine drag control - EDC EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.

Corner Traction Control - CTC* CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the pre- vailing traffic speed.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.192

Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1

Trailer stability assist (p. 323) function is to sta- bilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer* (p. 317).

NOTE

The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

(p. 192)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages (p. 193)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation

Selection of level - Sport mode The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be deactivated.

However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experi- ence.

Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY CAR. For a

description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

If, for example, the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal, then the ESC system intervenes and stabilises the car.

With Sport mode, maximum traction is also obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.

Sport mode is indicated in the com- bined instrument panel by means of this symbol illuminating with a constant glow until the driver deselects the

function or until the engine is switched off - after the next time the engine is started the ESC sys- tem is back in its normal mode again.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 191)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages (p. 193)

1 Trailer Stability Assist is included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

193

Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols and messages

Table

Symbol Message Specification

ESC Temporarily OFF ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required ESC system disengaged.

Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

and

"Message" There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) - Read it!

Constant glow for 2 seconds.

System check when the engine is started.

Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.

Constant glow. Sport mode is activated.

NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

194

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 191)

Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 192)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 195

Speed limiter* A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Overview

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel.

Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode.

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed.

Speed limiter active.

Related information Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 196)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 197)

Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)

Speed limiter* - getting started

Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel.

Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.

While driving 1. Press the steering wheel button to switch

on the speed limiter.

> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi- nates in the combined instrument panel.

2. When the car is moving at the desired high- est possible speed: Press one of the steering

wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.

> The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

When stationary 1. Press the steering wheel button to switch

on the speed limiter.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.196

2. Scroll with the button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.

> The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - changing speed

Changing the stored speed

Stored max. speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required max. speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode:

Press .

> The mark (5) in the combined instrument panel changes colour from GREEN to WHITE and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.

The speed limiter is reactivated with one

press on . The mark (5) then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN and the car's maximum speed is limited once again.

Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be set in standby mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 197

Depress the accelerator pedal fully.

> The combined instrument panel shows the stored maximum speed with a col- oured mark (5) and the driver can tempo- rarily exceed the set maximum speed - the mark (5) changes colour during this time from GREEN to WHITE.

The speed limiter is automatically reacti- vated after the release of the accelerator pedal and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/stored maximum speed - the display's mark (5) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN and the car's maximum speed is again limited.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)

Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 197)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented by the speed limiter from acciden- tally exceeding a speed that is selected/set in advance.

On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal.

The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.

NOTE

The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither

of the or buttons has been depressed during the last half minute.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)

Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 196)

Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)

Speed limiter* - deactivation A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regu- lates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre- selected/set speed by the speed limiter.

To deactivate the speed limiter:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's symbol for speed limiter (6) and the selection of the set speed (5) both extinguish - the set/stored speed is thus cleared and can-

not then be resumed with the button.

The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limita- tion.

Related information Speed limiter* (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)

Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 196)

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded (p. 197)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.198

Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.

Overview

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars without speed limiter2.

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars with speed limiter2.

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode.

Activate and adjust the speed.

Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).

Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 199)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

2 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 199

Cruise control* - managing speed It is possible to activate, set and change the stored speed.

Activating and setting the speed To start the cruise control:

Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE

(without speed limiter) or (with speed limiter).

> The cruise control symbol (6) in the com- bined instrument panel illuminates - cruise control is in standby mode.

To activate cruise control:

At the required speed - press the steering

wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in memory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) illuminates at the selected speed and the symbol (6) changes from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the stored speed.

NOTE

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust 5 km/h (5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives 5 km/h (5 mph).

To adjust 1 km/h (1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal

prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reacti- vate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 198)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is tem- porarily disengaged.

Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and automatically set in standby mode if:

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute3

the gear lever/selector is moved to N posi- tion

the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect

3 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.200

the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

wheels lose traction

engine speed is too low/high

speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).

The driver must then regulate the speed.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 198)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)

Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed.

After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 199) it is possible to resume the set speed.

To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button .

> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows the last stored speed.

NOTE

A marked speed increase may occur once the

speed has been resumed by selecting the button.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 198)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 199)

Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)

Cruise control* - deactivate

How it is deactivated is described here.

Cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the set/stored speed is thus cleared and cannot

then be resumed with the button.

Related information Cruise control* (p. 198)

Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 199)

Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 201

Distance Warning* The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert) warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead becomes too short.

Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

Orange-coloured warning lamp4.

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the wind- screen illuminates with a constant glow if the dis- tance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.

NOTE

Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.

WARNING Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.

Operation

Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre

console - in which case, the function is operated in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 115) - once there, search for the Distance Alert func- tion.

Set time interval

Controls and symbol for time interval.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Time interval - On.

4 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.202

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instru- ment panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre- sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

The same symbol is also shown when Adaptive cruise control (p. 205) is activated.

NOTE

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

The set time interval is also used by the func- tion adaptive cruise control (p. 205).

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

Related information Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 203)

Distance Warning* - limitations

This function, which uses the same radar sensor as Adaptive cruise control (p. 204) and Collision warning with auto brake (p. 229), has certain lim- itations.

NOTE

Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sun- glasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen.

Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front.

The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent.

Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

For further information on radar sensor limita- tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217) and (p. 234).

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 201)

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages (p. 203)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 203

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages

The function has certain symbols and messages that can be shown in the combined instrument

panel if the function is reduced due to its limita- tions.

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).

Collision warning Service required

Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Distance Warning* (p. 201)

Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.204

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.

The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows.

The driver sets the desired speed (p. 207) and time interval (p. 209) to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adap- ted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed.

If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode (p. 209) and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by the Distance Warning (p. 201) function about the short distance.

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com- ponents must only be performed at a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

For a limited time after the service, the ACC function can have a somewhat limited range. The system is calibrated whilst driving and full function returns automatically.

Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue assistance (p. 211) function.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed (p. 207)

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval (p. 209)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deacti- vation, and standby mode (p. 209)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 210)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise con- trol functionality (p. 213)

Radar sensor (p. 217)

Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action (p. 214)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 215)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 205

Adaptive cruise control* - function Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise con- trol system and a coordinated spacing system.

Function overview

Function overview5.

Warning lamp - braking by driver required

Steering wheel keypad (p. 206)

Radar sensor (p. 217)

WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- ance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc- tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 209) is meas- ured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 217). The cruise control function regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.

WARNING The brake pedal moves when the adaptive cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath the brake pedal - it may then become trapped.

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what the driver set for time interval (p. 209). If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored speed.

The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 217) braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h6

(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise con- trol is set in standby mode (p. 209) at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe dis- tance to the vehicle in front.

5 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model. 6 Queue Assist (p. 211) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.206

Warning lamp - braking by driver required Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's braking capacity.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk7.

If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then the warning lamp and warn- ing sound from the Collision warning system (p. 229) are used in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.

NOTE

Information on the windscreen may be diffi- cult to see in strong sunlight and when wear- ing sunglasses.

WARNING The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which its radar unit has detected - hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to slow down.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle (p. 210)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview Operation of the adaptive cruise control and steering wheel keypad varies depending on whether or not the car is equipped with speed

limiter8.

Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter

Cruise control - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Standby mode

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

7 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 207

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed.

Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.

Time interval - Increase/decrease.

Activate and adjust the speed.

(Not used)

Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

Time distance

ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 215)

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed

Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter9.

Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter9.

To start the ACC:

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.208

Press the steering wheel button - a simi- lar WHITE symbol illuminates in the com- bined instrument panel (8) which shows that the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode (p. 209).

To activate ACC:

At the required speed - press the steering

wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" (6) around the stored speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour from WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is active and the car maintains the stored

speed.

Only when the symbol shows an image of another vehicle is the distance to the vehicle in front controlled by the ACC.

At the same time a speed range is marked:

the higher speed with GREEN marking is the pre-programmed speed

the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle in front.

Changing the stored speed Stored speed is changed with short or long

presses on the or steering wheel button.

To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):

Use short presses - each press gives +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).

To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):

Hold down the button and release it at the required speed.

Last press made is stored in the memory.

If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal

prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect

the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

NOTE

If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then the function is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.

In certain situations it cannot be reactivated - in which case, the combined instrument panel (p. 215) shows Adaptive cruise control unavailable.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

9 An explanation of the illustration's figures is given in the section "Adaptive cruise control - overview" (p. 206).

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 209

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval

Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 hori- zontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One

line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

To set/change the time distance:

Turn the thumbwheel on the steering wheel

keypad (p. 206) (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiter).

At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly.

The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter- val to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably.

Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning (p. 201) function is activated.

NOTE

Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.

If the adaptive cruise control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the vehicle in front is pre- venting an increase in speed.

The higher the speed the longer the calcula- ted distance in metres for a given time inter- val.

Read more how speed is handled (p. 207).

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

Temporary deactivation/standby mode - with speed limiter To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

This symbol and the stored speed's marking then change colour from GREEN to WHITE.

Temporary deactivation/standby mode - without speed limiter To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

Press the steering wheel button

Standby mode due to driver intervention The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disen- gaged and set automatically in standby mode if:

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.210

the foot brake is used

the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than 1 minute10

the gear selector is moved to N position (automatic gearbox)

the driver maintains speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute.

The driver must then regulate the speed.

A temporary increase in speed with the accelera- tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 191). If any of these systems stops working, the adap- tive cruise control is deactivated automatically.

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Adaptive cruise control cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

An automatic deactivation can be due to:

the driver opens the door

the driver takes off his seatbelt

engine speed is too low/high

speed has fallen below 30 km/h11 (20 mph)

wheels lose traction

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).

Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reacti- vated with one press on the steering wheel but-

ton - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.

NOTE

A pronounced increase in speed may occur after the cruise control has been reactivated

with the button.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Cruise control* (p. 198)

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle

When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator12, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.

The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph).

WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during overtak- ing, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

10 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. 11 Does not apply to a car with Queue assistance - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 211

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate

Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is switched off with

the steering wheel button in the steering wheel keypad (p. 206) - the set/stored speed is thus cleared and cannot then be resumed with

the button.

Keypad without Speed limiter With a short press on the steering wheel button

the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 209). It is switched off with an addi- tional short press - the set/stored speed is thus

cleared and cannot then be resumed with the button.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 215)

Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance Queue assistance also provides the adaptive cruise control with enhanced functionality at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).

In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the queue assistance function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").

Queue assistance has the following functions:

Extended speed range - also at lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary

Change of target

Automatic braking ceases when stationary

Automatic activation parking brake.

Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.

Extended speed range

NOTE

In order to activate the adaptive cruise control, the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.

With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).

NOTE

A vehicle in front must be within a reasonable distance in order to enable activation of the adaptive cruise control at a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph).

For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati- cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the Adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with auto- matic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:

Press the steering wheel button

...or...

Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The adaptive cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.

12 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

212

NOTE

The Queue Assist function can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and the adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

The parking brake must be released before the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.

Change of target

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front.

When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a mov- ing vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.

WARNING When the adaptive cruise control is following a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a vehicle in front to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore the sta- tionary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.

The driver must intervene him/herself and brake.

Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode:

when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehi- cle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.

when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the adap- tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

Termination of automatic braking at a standstill In certain situations, queue assistance stops automatic braking at a standstill. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and

brake the car himself/herself in order to maintain its position.

Queue assistance releases the foot brake and sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode in the following situations:

the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal

the parking brake is applied

the gear selector is moved to P, N or R posi- tion

the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode.

Automatic activation parking brake In certain situations queue assistance applies the parking brake in order to keep the car remaining stationary.

This takes place if:

the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt

ESC is changed from Normal to Sport mode

Queue assistance has held the car stationary for more than 4 minutes

the engine is switched off

the brakes have overheated.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 213

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality

Changing from ACC to CC A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the combined instrument panel:

CC

Cruise Control

ACC

Adaptive Cruise Control

Cruise control Adaptive cruise control

With one press of the button the adaptive part (spacing system) in the cruise control is deacti- vated, at which point the car just follows the set/ stored speed.

Give a long press on the steering wheel but-

ton - the combined instrument panel's

symbol changes from to .

> By these means the standard cruise control (p. 198) CC (Cruise Control) is activated.

WARNING The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

Changing back from CC to ACC Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on the

button in accordance with the deactivation instructions (p. 211). The next time the system is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that is activated.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.214

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action

If the combined instrument panel shows the mes- sage Radar blocked See manual then it

means that the adaptive cruise control's radar sensor (p. 217) cannot detect other vehicles in front of the car.

This message indicates that neither of the func- tions for Distance Alert (p. 201) or Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) are working.

The following table presents examples of possi- ble causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:

Cause Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road sur- face.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Related information Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and mes- sages (p. 215)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 215

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may dis- play a symbol and/or text message. Here are

some examples - follow the recommendation given if appropriate:

Symbol Message Specification

The symbol is GREEN The car maintains the stored speed.

The symbol is WHITE Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

Set ESC to Normal to enable Cruise

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 191) has been set in Normal mode.

Adaptive cruise control cancelled

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Adaptive cruise control unavailable

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.

This could be due to:

brake temperature is high

the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See man- ual

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 213) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides informa- tion on appropriate alternatives.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.216

Symbol Message Specification

Adaptive cruise control Service required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press brake to hold vehi- cle + acoustic alarmA

The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.

The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Lead vehicle requiredA

Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) with- out a vehicle in front within the activation distance.

A Only with Queue Assist.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)

Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 217

Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.

The radar sensor is used by the following func- tions:

Distance Warning*

Adaptive cruise control*

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection*

IMPORTANT

In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:

Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The function may completely or partially dis- appear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.

Modification of the radar sensor could result in it being illegal to use.

Related information Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Distance Warning* (p. 201) Radar sensor - limitations A radar sensor (p. 217) has certain limitations - due to its limited field of vision for example.

The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:

the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed

its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.

NOTE

Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean - see subheading "Maintenance" (p. 233).

Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.218

ACC field of vision.

Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detect- ing vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle that drives in between the car and vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi- cles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

WARNING The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not main- taining a suitable speed or suitable distance.

The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions.

Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used.

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.

WARNING Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.

WARNING Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoid- ance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.

The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects.

Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junc- tions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.

Related information Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)

Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Distance Warning* (p. 201)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

219

Type approval - radar system Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Brazil

Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio.

Modelo: L2C0038TR

1071-10-3451

EAN: 07897843800248

Modelo: L2C0055TR

1500-15-8065

EAN: 07897843840978

Europe

Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA

The United Arab Emi- rates

TRA

REGISTERED No: 0018923/09

DEALER No: DA37380/15

TRA

REGISTERED No: ER37357/15

DEALER No: DA37380/15

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

220

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Indonesia 14785/POSTEL/2010 1982

38806/SDPPI/2015 4927

Jordan

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87

Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3

Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)

Korea

Certification No.

DPH-L2C0038TR

Certification No.

MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR

Morocco

AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC

Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009

Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009

AGREE PAR LANRT MAROC

NUMRO DAGRMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014

DATE DAGRMENT: 26/12/2014

Moldavia 1024

DRIVER SUPPORT

221

Market ACCA BLISB Symbol Type approval

Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DA105753

South Africa

TA-2009/163

APPROVED

TA-2014/2390

APPROVED

Taiwan

CCAB09LP4590T3

CCAB15LP0680T0

A ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control B BLIS = Blind Spot Information

Related information Radar sensor (p. 217)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.222

City Safety City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traf- fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

The City Safety function is active at speeds below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away.

City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary inter- vention.

City Safety must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City Safety to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice City Safety if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.

If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229)* these two systems complement each other.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be per- formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WARNING

City Safety does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road condi- tions.

City Safety does not react to vehicles driv- ing in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to humans and animals.

City Safety can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Never wait for City Safety to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for maintain- ing the proper distance and speed.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 224)

City Safety - function (p. 223)

City Safety - operation (p. 223)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 226)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 228)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

223

City Safety - function City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of colli- sion, City Safety will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as heavy braking.

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window13.

If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph) in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety can completely avoid a collision.

City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce- dure and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.

If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety

may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain full brake force, the driver must depress the brake pedal and this could then make it possible to avoid a collision, even at speed differences above 15 km/h (9 mph).

When the function is activated and brakes, the combined instrument panel shows a text mes- sage to the effect that the function is/has been active.

NOTE

When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on.

Related information City Safety - limitations (p. 224)

City Safety (p. 222)

City Safety - operation (p. 223)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 226)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 228)

City Safety - operation City Safety is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traf- fic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

On and Off

NOTE

The City Safety function is activated auto- matically when the engine is started.

In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.

City Safety handled in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115) and after starting the engine the function can be deactivated as follows:

Search in MY CAR for Driver support system and select the Off option at City Safety.

However, the function will be enabled the next time the engine is started, regardless of whether the system was enabled or disabled when the engine was switched off.

13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

224

WARNING The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City Safety is disabled manually.

Related information City Safety (p. 222)

City Safety - limitations (p. 224)

City Safety - function (p. 223)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 226)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 228)

MY CAR (p. 115)

City Safety - limitations The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night.

However, the function does have some limita- tions.

The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may also disrupt the function.

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro- jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon- net limit the function.

The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light reflectors.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS14 and ESC15 systems will provide best pos- sible braking force with maintained stability.

When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated.

City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when park- ing.

Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.

When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

14 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 15 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

225

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor free from ice, snow and dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- tion (p. 223)).

Do not affix or mount anything on the windscreen in front of the laser sensor.

Remove ice and snow from the bonnet - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual is shown in the combined instru- ment panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn that City Safety is not operational.

The Windscreen sensors blocked See manual message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.

The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with sugges- tions for appropriate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen surface in front of the laser sen- sor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the wind- screen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.

The laser sensor field of vision is blocked.

Remove the block- ing object.

IMPORTANT

If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 223)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City Safety.

To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City Safety, the fol- lowing also applies:

Volvo recommends that you do not repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor - instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.

Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.

The same type or Volvo-approved wind- screen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

226

Related information City Safety (p. 222)

City Safety - function (p. 223)

City Safety - operation (p. 223)

City Safety - laser sensor The City Safety function includes a sensor which transmits laser light (see illustration (p. 223) for sensor location). Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.

The following two labels relate to the laser sen- sor:

The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:

Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser beam with optical instruments - Class 1M laser product.

The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) stand- ards for laser product design with the excep- tion of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.

Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy 2.64 J

Maximum average output 45 mW

Pulse duration 33 ns

Divergence (horizontal x vertical) 28 12

DRIVER SUPPORT

227

WARNING If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

Never look into the laser sensor (which emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.

Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.

To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or main- tenance other than those specified here.

The repairer must follow specially drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

Do not remove the laser sensor (this includes removing the lenses). A removed laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury.

The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the wind- screen.

The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connec- tor is plugged in.

The laser sensor transmits a laser light when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 81) even if the engine is switched off.

Related information City Safety (p. 222)

City Safety - limitations (p. 224)

City Safety - function (p. 223)

City Safety - operation (p. 223)

City Safety - symbols and messages (p. 228)

DRIVER SUPPORT

228

City Safety - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City Safety (p. 222) system, one or more symbols

may illuminate in the combined instrument panel and a text message may be shown. A text mes- sage can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Auto braking by City Safety City Safety is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.

Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.

Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 224).

City Safety Service required City Safety is not operational.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information City Safety (p. 222)

City Safety - limitations (p. 224)

City Safety - function (p. 223)

City Safety - operation (p. 223)

City Safety - laser sensor (p. 226)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 229

Collision warning system* "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are sta- tionary or moving in the same direction.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situa- tions where the driver should have started brak- ing earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be acti- vated as late as possible in order to avoid unnec- essary intervention.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed.

"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warn- ing with Auto Brake to do the braking, there might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.

Two system levels Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Col- lision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and

Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in two variants:

Level 1 The driver is merely warned16 of occurring obsta- cles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake.

Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.

IMPORTANT

Maintenance of the internal components of the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 232)

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - limitations (p. 235)

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 236)

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages (p. 238)

16 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.230

Collision warning system* - function

Function overview17.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk.

Radar sensor18

Camera sensor

Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes three steps in the following order:

1. Collision warning

2. Brake support18

3. Auto Brake18

The collision warning system and City Safety (p. 222) complement each other.

1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially immi- nent collision.

The collision warning system can detect pedes- trians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as your car and are located in front of you.

If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian, cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1) and an acoustic signal.

2 - Brake support18

If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.

This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented.

Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

3 - Auto Brake18

The automatic brake function is activated last.

If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

17 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 18 With system Level 2 only.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 231

WARNING The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals.

Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform about limita- tions that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a colli- sion or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained - even when the collision warning system with auto-brake is used.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists

The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.

Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly from behind and in the car's centre line.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as possible about the body and bicycle contours - this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the sys- tem cannot detect a cyclist.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.232

For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult bicycle".

The bicycle must be equipped with a highly visible and approved19 rearward-facing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.

The function can only detect cyclists directly from behind and who are travelling in the same direction - not at an angle from behind, not from the side.

Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The function's capacity to detect cyclists is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.

For optimum bicycle detection, the City Safety function must be activated, see City Safety (p. 222).

WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance.

The function cannot detect:

all cyclists in all situations and does not see partially obscured cyclists, for exam- ple.

cyclists in clothing that obscures the con- tours of the body or who are approaching from the side.

bicycles that have no rearward-facing red reflector.

bicycles loaded with large objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes- trians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information as possible about the contours of the body - this implies the opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a nor- mal human pattern of movement.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.

19 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 233

In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.

The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

The camera sensor's capacity to detect pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when street- lights are lit.

WARNING "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means of assistance. The function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and does not see, for example:

partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.

pedestrians who are carrying larger objects.

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven properly and with a safety dis- tance adapted to the speed.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - operation

Warning signals On and Off

1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk20.

You can select whether the collision warning sys- tem's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off.

When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.

NOTE

The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be deacti- vated.

Settings for the collision warning system are made via the centre console's screen and the menu system MY CAR, see (p. 115).

Light and acoustic signals When the collision warning system's light and acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp (no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's separate points of light.

After starting the engine, both the light and acoustic signals can be switched off:

Search for Collision warning in Driver support system in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115) - and there select to uncheck the function.

Acoustic signal After starting the engine the warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:

Search for Warning sound in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115) - and there select On or Off.

Following which, the collision warning system is only indicated with a light signal.

20 The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.234

Set warning distance The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are deployed.

Search for Warning distance in Collision warning in the menu system MY CAR (p. 115) - and there select Long, Normal or Short.

The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, then change to warning distance Normal.

Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

NOTE

When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off.

The collision warning system warns the driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

In order for the collision warning system to be effective - always drive with Distance Warning (p. 201) set at time interval 45.

NOTE

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

WARNING No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.

Checking settings The current settings can be controlled via the centre console's screen and the menu system (p. 115) MY CAR.

Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor21.

For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

21 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 235

Collision warning system* - limitations The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).

The collision warning system's visual warning sig- nal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 230)) may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- ing sound should therefore always be activated.

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC (p. 191) systems will provide best possible brak- ing force with maintained stability.

NOTE

The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deacti- vated in the menu system.

Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or if steer- ing wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic sit- uation or external influences mean that the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front cor- rectly.

The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists22 - the system can give effective warnings and brake interven- tions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow- moving vehicles, warnings and brake interven- tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph).

Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehi- cles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedes- trians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

The collision warning system uses the same radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control (p. 204). Read more about radar sensor limita- tions (p. 217).

If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced (p. 233). This would lead to the system

warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not acti- vated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does not intervene in sit- uations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.

In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warn- ing may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

22 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.236

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.

The cars camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:

Active main beam (p. 94)

Road sign information (p. 244)

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 249)

Lane assistance (p. 252)

NOTE

Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt.

Do not stick or attach anything to the wind- screen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the cam- era to stop working.

The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for exam- ple. Under such conditions the functions of cam- era-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.

Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage- way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also sig- nificantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.

The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated.

During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.

Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen sensors blocked See manual then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

At the same time, this means that - besides Colli- sion Warning with Auto Brake - the following functions will not have full functionality either:

Active main beam

Driver Alert Control

Lane Keeping Aid

Road sign information

The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropri- ate action.

Cause Action

The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera is dirty or cov- ered with ice or snow.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow.

Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well.

No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

The windscreen sur- face in front of the camera has been cleaned but the mes- sage remains.

Wait. It may take sev- eral minutes for the camera to measure the visibility.

Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.

Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 237

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.238

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the

driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

SymbolA Message Specification

Collision warning sys- tem OFF

Collision warning system switched off.

Shown when the engine is started.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Collision warning sys- tem Unavailable

The collision warning system cannot be activated.

Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.

The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.

Auto Braking was acti- vated

Auto Brake has been active.

The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 239

SymbolA Message Specification

Radar blocked See manual

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.

The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).

Collision warning Serv- ice required

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Collision warning system* (p. 229)

Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians (p. 232)

Collision warning system* - detection of cyclists (p. 231)

Collision warning system* - operation (p. 233)

Collision warning system* - limitations (p. 235)

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 236)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.240

BLIS* BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev- eral lanes in the same direction.

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warn- ing about:

vehicles in the car's blind spot

rapidly approaching vehicles in the left and right-hand lanes closest to the car.

The BLIS function CTA (p. 242) (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warn- ing about:

crossing traffic when the car is reversed.

WARNING BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

BLIS can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe man- ner.

Overview

BLIS lamp location23.

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.

Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.

To ensure optimal functionality the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Related information BLIS* - operation (p. 241)

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)

CTA* (p. 242)

23 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 241

BLIS* - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with sev- eral lanes in the same direction.

Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button on the centre con- sole.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 115).

When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the com- bined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation.

To extinguish the message:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

or

Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message extin- guishes.

When BLIS operates

Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rap- idly approaching vehicle.

The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph).

The system is designed to react when:

the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other vehicles

the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up by another vehicle.

When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.

WARNING BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.

Limitations Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can

reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect haz- ards if it is covered.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the car's electrical system.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.242

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information BLIS* (p. 240)

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)

CTA* The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to BLIS (p. 240).

Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for BLIS in the door panels flashing once.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.

The CTA function can be deactivated/activated separately with the Parking assistance (p. 261) On/Off button. The BLIS lamps flash once on reactivation.

However, the BLIS function remains activated after the CTA has been deactivated.

WARNING CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors.

CTA can never replace the driver's responsi- bility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.

When CTA operates

Principle for CTA.

CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side during reversing, such as when reversing out of a park- ing space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

243

detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

CTA is only active during reversing and is acti- vated automatically when the gearbox's reverse position is selected.

If CTA detects something approaching from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right-hand speaker, depending on the direc- tion from which the object is approaching.

CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS lamps.

An additional warning is provided in the form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 261).

Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi- cles or obstructing objects.

Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.

Blind CTA sector.

Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side.

However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-

cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases.

Examples of further limitations:

Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect haz- ards if it is covered.

CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con- nected to the cars electrical system.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com- ponents or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of the car.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.244

Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.

To ensure optimal functionality the areas in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors.

Related information BLIS* (p. 240)

BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)

BLIS - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot Information) (p. 240) and CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) (p. 242) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a sym- bol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.

Message examples:

Message Specification

CTA OFF CTA is manually switched off - BLIS is active.

BLIS and CTA OFF Trailer attached

BLIS and CTA are temporarily non-operational because a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.

BLIS and CTA Service required

BLIS and CTA are non-opera- tional.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Related information BLIS* (p. 240)

Road Sign Information (RSI)* The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 245

Examples of readable speed related signs24.

The RSI function gives information on current speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/ ending and when overtaking is prohibited.

If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permit- ted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.

WARNING RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and reg- ulations are followed.

Related information Road sign information (RSI)* - operation

(p. 245)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 248)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.

The function is operated as follows:

Recorded speed information25.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.

24 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 25 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

246

Together with the symbol for the current speed limit, a sign showing that overtaking is pro- hibited may also be displayed where appropriate.

End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the com- bined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway.

Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs25.

Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign then indi- cates the circumstances under which the differ- ent speeds apply. The road section may be par- ticularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example.

An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.

The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow.

Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed

only if the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a spe- cific distance or at a certain time of day. The driv- er's attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the sym- bol showing speed.

Display of additional information

A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has

25 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 247

detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit.

Setting in MY CAR There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu system; see MY CAR (p. 115).

Road sign information On/Off

The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. The function can be acti- vated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Speed warning

The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h (5 mph) or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Sensus Navigation If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases:

On detecting signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit26, such as motorway and expressway.

If a previously detected sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations (p. 248)

MY CAR (p. 115)

26 Variations may occur in different markets.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.248

Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed. The function has the following limita- tions.

The RSI function's camera sensor has limitations just like the human eye - read more about cam- era sensor limitations (p. 236)).

Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/ districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.

Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function:

Faded signs

Signs positioned on bends

Rotated or damaged signs

Concealed or poorly positioned signs

Signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt.

Related information Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)

Road sign information (RSI)* - operation (p. 245)

Driver Alert System* The Driver Alert System is intended to assist dri- vers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.

The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:

Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 249).

Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 252).

or

Lane Keeping Aid - LKA (p. 256)

A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).

The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).

Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.

WARNING Driver Alert System does not work in all situa- tions but is designed merely as a supplemen- tary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Related information Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 249

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* The DAC function is intended to attract the driv- er's attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.

The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio- rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.

A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly.

In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a

break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.

NOTE

The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regu- lar intervals, and make sure you are well rested.

Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam- ple:

in strong side winds

on rutted road surfaces.

NOTE

The camera sensor has certain limitations (p. 236).

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 248)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 249)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages (p. 251)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings are made from the centre console dis- play screen and its menu system.

On/Off The Driver Alert function can be set in standby mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 115):

Checked box - function activated.

Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.250

Function Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).

If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified by an acoustic sig- nal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break - the linked symbol

is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.

The warning symbol can go off:

Press the left stalk switch OK button.

WARNING An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition.

In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest.

Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 248)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 251

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages DAC (p. 249) can show symbols and text mes- sages on the combined instrument panel or in

the centre console's display screen in different situations.

Here are some examples:

SymbolA Message Specification

Driver Alert Time for a break The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).

Driver Alert system Service required The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information Driver Alert System* (p. 248)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 249)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p. 249)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.252

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* The purpose of Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations on motorways and similar major routes.

Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA There are two versions of Lane assistance:

LDW - Lane Departure Warning - alerts the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel.

LKA - Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) - steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel.

The car is supplied with one of these two sys- tems - market and engine alternative determine which of the systems the car is equipped with.

In the event of uncertainty whether the car has LDW or LKA:

Open the menu system MY CAR and locate Driver support system - which specifies Lane Departure Warning if the car has LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA.

Principle for LDW

(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)

A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.

Warning with steering wheel vibration27.

If the car crosses one of the side lines the driver is alerted with an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel. Steering wheel vibration var- ies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the longer the vibration.

NOTE

The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

WARNING Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function

(p. 253)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation (p. 254)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 254)

27 The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 253

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages (p. 255)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Driver Alert System* (p. 248)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning) function.

Off & On

Press the centre console's button to activate or deactivate the function. The button's lamp illumi- nates when the function is switched on.

This function is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in differ- ent situations.

Personal preferences Settings are made from the centre console's screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

Select from the options:

On at startup - The function is set in standby mode each time the engine is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.254

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning) is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in differ- ent situations. Here are some examples:

LDW function side lines.

The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines - the function is active and detects/"sees" one side line, or both.

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the function is active but detects neither left nor right side line.

or

The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the function is in standby mode because the speed is below 65 km/h (40 mph).

The LDW symbol has no side lines - the function is deactivated.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning) camera sensor has limitations in a sim- ilar way to the human eye.

For more information, read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).

NOTE

There are some situations where LDW does not give any warning, such as:

Direction indicators are switched on

The driver has his/her foot on the brake pedal28

In the event of rapid depression of the accelerator pedal28

In the event of rapid steering wheel movements28

If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

28 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 253).

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 255

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols and messages In situations where there is no Lane assistance function, a symbol may be shown in the com-

bined instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the recommenda- tion given if appropriate.

Message examples:

Symbol Message Specification

Lane Departure Warning ON/Lane Depar- ture Warning OFF

The function is switched on/off.

Shown at switch-on/off.

The text disappears after approx. 5 seconds.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).

Driver Alert system Service required The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.256

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* The purpose of Lane Departure Warning is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situa- tions on motorways and similar major routes.

Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA There are two versions of Lane assistance:

LDW - Lane Departure Warning - alerts the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel.

LKA - Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) - steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration in the steering wheel.

The car is supplied with one of these two sys- tems - market and engine alternative determine which of the systems the car is equipped with.

In the event of uncertainty whether the car has LDW or LKA:

Open the menu system MY CAR and locate Driver support system - which specifies Lane Departure Warning if the car has LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA.

Principle for LKA

(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)

A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.

If the car is about to cross a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer the car back into the lane with a slight steering torque in the steer- ing wheel.

If the car reaches or crosses a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel.

WARNING Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regu- lations are followed.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p. 257)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p. 258)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations (p. 259)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and mes- sages (p. 260)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Driver Alert System* (p. 248)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

257

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keep- ing Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.

Off & On Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is temporar- ily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane's side lines.

Press the centre console's button to activate or deactivate the function. The button's lamp illumi- nates when the function is switched on.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case the function is instead handled in the car's menu system MY

CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 115).

In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:

Warning with vibration in the steering wheel: Vibration only - On or Off.

Active steering: Steering assist only- On or Off.

Both Warning with vibration in the steering wheel and Active steering: Full function - On or Off.

Active steering Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.

LKA intervenes and steers away.

If the car approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is not acti- vated, the car is steered back into the lane.

Warning with vibration in steering wheel

LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibration29.

If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keeping Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the steer- ing wheel30. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering torque.

29 The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed. 30 Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.258

Dynamic cornering

LKA does not intervene in sharp inside bends.

In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the car to cross lane lines without engaging active steering or activating a warning. Using an adja- cent lane for cutting a corner when there is a clear line of vision is an example of this.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) is comple- mented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:

NOTE

LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.

LKA "sees" and follows the side lines.

If Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with WHITE lines.

GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does not see a line on that side of the car.

LKA intervenes on the right-hand side.

Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:

RED line for the side in question.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 259

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) camera sensor has limitations in a similar way to the human eye.

For more information, read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236) and see Collision warning system* - operation (p. 233).

NOTE

In certain demanding situations Lane assis- tance may have difficulty assisting the driver in the right way - in which case it is recom- mended to deactivate the function.

Examples of such situations may be:

roadworks

winter road conditions

poor road surface

very sporty driving style

poor weather with reduced visibility.

Hands on the steering wheel In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If hands are not detected on the steering wheel then a text message is shown, prompting the driver to actively steer the car.

If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes into

standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.260

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and messages In situations where there is no Lane assistance function, a symbol may be shown in the com-

bined instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the recommenda- tion given if appropriate.

Message examples:

Symbol Message Specification

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.

Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 236) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 233).

Lane Keeping Aid Serv- ice required

The system is disengaged.

Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Lane Keeping Aid Inter- rupted

LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.

Related information Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 256)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 252)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 261

Park Assist* Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the cen- tre console's VOL knob. The sound level can also be adjusted in the audio settings menu, which is accessed by pressing SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 115) MY CAR31.

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only

Both front and rear.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking.

The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected.

Be aware of e.g. people or animals near the car.

Related information Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.

If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 242) the indi- cator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 240) once, then parking assistance is activated using the button.

31 Depending on the audio and media system.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.262

Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear.

The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.

Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car sym- bol a selected sector box is, the shorter the dis- tance between the car and a detected obstacle.

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically.

When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both behind and in front of the car, then the tone sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

IMPORTANT

Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sen- sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect- edly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obsta- cles behind comes from one of the rear loud- speakers.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off automati- cally - otherwise the sensors would react to the trailer.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 263

NOTE

When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car- rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate distance to detected obstacles.

The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

The distance covered in front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.

The front parking assistance system is active up to 10 km/h (6 mph).

If the Parking Assistance System is deactivated because the car is moving too quickly - 11 km/h

(7 mph) or above - the function is reactivated when the speed falls below 10 km/h (6 mph).

NOTE

Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.

IMPORTANT

When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.264

Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message

Park Assist System Service required is shown then parking assistance is disengaged.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

Sensor location, front.

Sensor location, rear.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - function (p. 261)

Park assist syst* - forward (p. 263)

Park assist syst* - backward (p. 262)

Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 264)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 265

Park assist camera* Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which is activated when the reverse gear is selected.

The camera image is shown on the centre con- sole's screen.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING

The parking camera serves as an aid. It does not relieve the driver of responsibil- ity when reversing.

The camera has blind spots, where obsta- cles cannot be detected.

Be aware of people and animals in the vicinity of the car.

Function and operation

Camera location next to the opening handle.

The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides.

The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar.

Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

If another view is active then the parking camera system takes over automatically and its camera image is displayed on the screen.

When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitch- ing a trailer. The car's approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated - see section Settings (p. 267).

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance sensors (p. 261)* then their information is shown graphically as coloured areas in order to illustrate distances to detected obstacles, see heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the text.

The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or 35 km/h (22 mph) backward.

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.

NOTE

Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic- ularly important in poor light.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

266

Park assist lines

Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel movement, which shows the driver the path the car will then take - also when the car is turning.

NOTE

When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.

The screen shows no lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's elec- trical system.

The parking camera is deactivated auto- matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

IMPORTANT

Remember, that with the rear camera view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.

Boundary lines

The system's different lines.

Boundary line, free reversing zone

"Wheel tracks"

The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

DRIVER SUPPORT

}}

* Option/accessory. 267

Cars with reversing sensors*

Coloured fields (one per sensor) show distance.

If the car is also equipped with Parking assis- tance (p. 261) the distance is shown with col- oured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle.

The colour of the areas changes with decreasing distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yel- low, via orange to red.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Light yellow 0.71.5

Yellow 0.50.7

Orange 0.30.5

Red 00.3

Related information Park assist camera - settings (p. 267)

Park assist camera - limitations (p. 268)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

Park assist camera - settings

Activate switched-off camera The camera starts automatically when reverse gear is selected, but it can also be activated man- ually as follows:

Press CAM - the screen shows the current camera view.

Change setting The settings for the parking camera can be changed when the screen shows a camera view:

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown - the screenchanges to a menu with various options.

2. Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.

3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU once and go back out with EXIT.

||

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.268

Towbar The camera can be used to advantage when hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the tow- bar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can be shown on the screen - exactly as for the "wheel tracks".

A choice can be made between showing the "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both options cannot be shown simultaneously.

1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown.

2. Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory guide line option with TUNE.

3. Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU once and go back out with EXIT.

Zoom If precise manoeuvring is required then the cam- era view can be zoomed in:

Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/ turn changes back to the normal view.

If more options are available, they are in a loop - press/turn until the desired camera view is shown.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

Park assist camera - limitations

NOTE

A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the cam- era's view.

To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.

Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and snow.

Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.

Related information Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park assist camera - settings (p. 267)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space.

The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text for when the different steps are to be carried out.

The On/Off button is on located the centre console.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 269

WARNING PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always has the final responsibility for driving the car in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surroundings and other road users approaching or passing while parking.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and mes-

sages (p. 273)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 270)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 269)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 272)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:

The functions ABS32 or ESC33 must not intervene when the PAP function is activated - these can be activated in the event of e.g. steep and slippery surfaces, see the sections on Foot brake and Stability system ESC (p. 191) for more information.

A trailer must not be connected to the car.

Speed must be lower than 50 km/h (30 mph).

Principle for PAP.

The PAP function parks the car using the follow- ing steps:

1. The function searches for a parking space and measures it - during measurement, speed must not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

2. The car is steered into the space during reversing.

3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

32 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 33 (Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.270

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation

NOTE

Remember that certain steering wheel posi- tions may obstruct the combined instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.

1 - Searching and checking measurements

NOTE

The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to:

keep a close watch around the car

follow the instructions in the combined instrument panel

change gear (reverse/forward)

control and maintain a safe speed

brake and stop.

NOTE

The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres while PAP is searching for a parking space.

The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:

1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h (20 mph).

2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

NOTE

PAP searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its pas- senger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:

Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead.

2 - Reversing in

During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 271

1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.

2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

NOTE

Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is acti- vated.

Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.

To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward.

3 - Positioning

When the car has reversed into the parking space, it must be straightened up and positioned.

1. Engage first gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.

2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.

3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.

The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is com- plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.

IMPORTANT

The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and mes-

sages (p. 273)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 269)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 272)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory.272

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations

The PAP sequence is stopped:

if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph)

if the driver touches the steering wheel

if the ABS34 or ESC35 function is engaged - e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road surface.

A text message indicates where the PAP sequence was stopped.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent meas- urement.

IMPORTANT

Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid not an infallible, fully-auto- matic function. The driver must therefore be pre- pared to intervene. There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

PAP starts out from the current location of the parked vehicles - if they are inappropri- ately parked then the car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged against kerbs.

PAP is designed for parking on straight streets, not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP measures the space.

It is not always possible to find parking spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such park- ing situations, it helps the system to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.

Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.

Objects situated higher than the detection areas of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early, and hence such parking spaces should be avoided.

The driver is responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suita- ble for parking.

Use approved tyres36 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects PAP's ability to park the car.

Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly.

Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted.

Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro- truding from the car.

34 (Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system. 35 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control. 36 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

DRIVER SUPPORT

* Option/accessory. 273

IMPORTANT

Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Maintenance

The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers37 - 6 front and 4 rear.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen- sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.

Related information Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p. 264)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and messages

The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text for when the different steps are to be carried out.

The combined instrument panel may display dif- ferent combinations of symbols and text with varying meaning - sometimes with self-explana- tory advice on appropriate action.

If a message indicates that PAP is inoperative then contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p. 270)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 269)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p. 272)

Park Assist* (p. 261)

Park assist camera* (p. 265)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 268)

37 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

STARTING AND DRIVING

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.276

Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.

IMPORTANT

Do not press in the remote control key incor- rectly turned - hold the end with the detacha- ble key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 169).

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position.

2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the brake pedal.)

3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.

When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its over- heating protection triggers.

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts - wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat- tery is allowed to recover.

WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch after starting the engine or when the car is being towed.

WARNING Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in par- ticular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works - see Key posi- tions (p. 81).

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Keyless starting (Keyless drive)* Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 173) starting of the engine.

NOTE

A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the keyless start and lock function is in the pas- senger compartment or cargo area.

WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

Related information Switching off the engine (p. 277)

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 277

Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.

To stop the engine:

Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine stops.

If the gear selector is not in P position or if the car is moving:

Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or hold the button depressed until the engine stops.

Related information Key positions (p. 81)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks or locks.

Function The steering lock is activated when the driv-

er's door is opened after the engine has been switched off.

The steering lock is deactivated when the remote control key is in the ignition switch2

and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 276)

Key positions (p. 81)

Steering wheel (p. 88)

Remote start (ERS)* Remote start (ERS Engine Remote Start) means that the car's engine can be started remotely in order to be able to warm up/cool down the passenger compartment before depar- ture. Remote start is activated via key and/or via Volvo On Call*.

The climate control system starts on automatic settings. A remote-started engine is activated for a maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. After two activations of remote start, the engine must be started in the normal way before remote start can be used again.

Engine remote start is only available in cars with automatic gearbox and cars that have a bonnet switch3 installed.

NOTE

The service life of the remote control key's battery is affected by the remote start func- tion. In the event of frequent use of remote start, the battery should therefore be changed once per year, see Remote control key - replacing the battery (p. 172).

2 In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment. 3 Available in the XC60, cars with alarm, most cars with 4-cylinder engines or if ERS is selected for new construction.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.278

NOTE

Follow local/national rules/regulations on idling. Also take into account the local/ national rules/regulations regarding the noise level when the engine is running.

WARNING To remote-start the engine, the following cri- teria must be met:

The car must be supervised.

There must be no people or animals inside or around the car.

The car must not be parked in a closed, unventilated area - the exhaust gases may seriously injure humans and animals.

Related information Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 278)

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages (p. 279)

Remote start (ERS) - operation

The key's buttons for remote start.

Unlocking

Locking

Approach lighting

Unlocking, tailgate

Information4

Remote starting the engine To be able to remotely start the engine the car must be locked and the bonnet closed.

Proceed as follows:

1. Briefly press on the key's button (2).

2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a long press - at least 2 seconds - on button (3).

If the conditions for remote start are fulfilled then the following takes place:

1. The direction indicators flash quickly several times.

2. The engine starts.

3. The direction indicators illuminate with a con- stant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the engine has started.

NOTE

After remote starting, the car continues to be locked but with deactivated movement detec- tor*.

With PCC5 key The light indication for Approach light- ing6 flashes a few times when the but- ton is pressed and then changes over to constant glow if all criteria for

remote start have been fulfilled. However, this does not mean that remote start has started the engine.

4 Only on PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 167). 5 For more information on the PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 167). 6 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 166) and Approach lighting (p. 101).

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 279

To check whether remote start has started the engine, the user can press the button (5) - if the engine has started, there is a light indication by the buttons (2) and (3).

Active functions The following functions are activated with a remote started engine:

Climate control system

Audio/video system

Approach lighting.

Deactivated functions The following functions are deactivated with a remote started engine:

Headlamps

Position lamps

Number plate lighting

Windscreen wiper.

Remote start is stopped The following steps switch off a remote-started engine:

The remote control key's button (1), (2) or (4) is depressed

The car is unlocked

A door is opened

Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is depressed

The gear selector is moved out of P position

Active remote start time exceeds 15 minutes.

When a remote-started engine is switched off, the direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds.

Related information Remote start (ERS)* (p. 277)

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages (p. 279)

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages

In situations where the ERS function fails or is interrupted, a symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel, supplemented by an explana- tory text message.

ERS function unavailable

Message Specification

No remote start Too many tries

ERS unavailable because a maximum of 2 ERS activa- tions in succession are allowed.

No remote start Low fuel level

ERS unavailable because fuel level too low.

No remote start Gear not in P

ERS unavailable because gear selector is not in P position.

No remote start Driver in car

ERS unavailable because someone is in the passen- ger compartment.

No remote start Low bat- tery

ERS unavailable due to low battery voltage. Charge the battery by starting the engine.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.280

Message Specification

No remote start Engine warning

ERS unavailable due to warning message from engine. Contact a work- shopA.

Remote start off Engine coolant level low

ERS unavailable due to error message from cool- ing system, see Coolant - level (p. 362).

No remote start Door open

ERS unavailable because a door/tailgate was not closed.

No remote start Bonnet open

ERS did not activate because the bonnet was not closed.

No remote start Car not locked

ERS unavailable because the car was not locked.

No remote star Key in car

ERS did not activate because the key was in the car.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Interrupted ERS function

Message Specification

Remote start off Gear not in P

ERS interrupted because gear selector is not in P position.

Remote start off Driver in car

ERS interrupted because someone is in the passen- ger compartment.

Remote start off Engine warning

ERS interrupted due to error message from engine. Contact a work- shopA.

Remote start off Engine coolant level low

ERS interrupted due to error message from cool- ing system.

Remote start off Bonnet open

ERS interrupted because the bonnet is open.

Remote start off Low battery

ERS interrupted since the battery voltage is too low.

Remote start off Low fuel level

ERS interrupted since the fuel level is too low.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Remote start (ERS)* (p. 277)

Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 278)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

281

Jump starting with another battery If the starter battery (p. 377) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:

1. Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.

5. Open the clips on the front cover of the bat- tery in your car and remove the cover, see Starter battery - replacement (p. 379).

6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).

8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt.

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - first the black and then the red.

> Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.282

Related information Starting the engine (p. 276)

Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox. Manual gearbox and automatic gearbox.

Manual gearbox (p. 282)

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic (p. 284)

IMPORTANT

To prevent damage to any drive system com- ponents, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over- heating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel in conjunction with a text message being shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)

Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

Gearing pattern.

The manual gearbox has 6 gears, the shifting pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf- ficient to hold the car in all situations.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 283

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Follow the gearing pattern printed on the gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.

Engage reverse gear only when the car is stationary.

Related information Gearboxes (p. 282)

Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p. 417)

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear.

An essential detail in connection with environ- mental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time.

An indicator is available as an aid on certain vari- ants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption.

However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed. The framed number indi- cates the current gear.

Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for manual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - during normal driving it is only illumi- nated in the centre.

At the recommended upshift the cursor illuminates "+", and at the recom- mended downshift the cursor illuminates "-" (marked red in the illustration).

Automatic gearbox

Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.

The framed number indicates the current gear.

With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are displayed in its centre.

Related information Manual gearbox (p. 282)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.284

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.

Combined instrument panel (p. 66) shows the position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.

Gear positions Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel. (Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.

Parking position - P Select P position when starting the engine or when the car is parked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and key position must be II, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake (p. 303) when the car is parked.

NOTE

The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

Reverse position - R The car must be stationary when R position is selected.

Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta- tionary with the gear selector in N position.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from N to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and key position must be II, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to D position from R position.

Geartronic Manual gear positions (+S-) The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from posi- tion D to the end position at "+S-". The combined instrument panel's symbol

"+S-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are shown in a box, cor- responding to the gear selected at the time.

Move the lever forwards towards "+" (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever,

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 285

which returns to its rest position between + and .

or

Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode "+S" can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end position at D.

NOTE

If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the gear selector has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+S" position. The com- bined instrument panel then changes indica- tion from S to show which of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

Paddles* As a supplement to manual gear changing with the gear selector there are also controls located on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".

To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is by means of pulling one of the paddles toward the steering wheel - the combined instrument panel then changes indication from "D" to a fig- ure, which indicates the current gear.

To then change gear one step:

Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release.

Both steering wheel "paddles".

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range.

After each gear change the combined instrument panel changes figure to show the current gear.

NOTE

Automatic deactivation

If the steering wheel paddles are not used then they are deactivated after a short time - this is indicated when the combined instru- ment panel switches indication, from the fig- ure for the current gear back to "D".

The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated as long as engine braking is in progress.

Manual deactivation

The steering wheel paddle shifters can also be deactivated manually:

Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel and hold until the combined instru- ment panel changes character from the figure for the current gear to "D".

The paddles can also be used with the gear selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are constantly activated without being deactivated.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.286

Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)7

The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more quickly to

acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.

To activate Sport mode:

Move the gear selector to the side from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indica- tion from D to S.

Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indication from D to the figure 18.

2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever for- ward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.

Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent over-revving the engine, the transmis- sion's control program has a protective downshift inhibitor, which prevents the kick-down function.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the

engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Towing If the car has to be towed - see important infor- mation in the section Towing (p. 324).

Related information Transmission fluid - grade and volume

(p. 417)

Gearboxes (p. 282)

7 With certain engines only. 8 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

287

Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 0 2 1 3 5 1

M: Manual shifting9 - "+/-" or "Sport mode".

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhib- itor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- tems:

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another position.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) In order to be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 81) must be II.

Shiftlock Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irre- spective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked.

In order to be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the key posi- tion (p. 81) must be II.

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat starter battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.

Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and locate a hole10 for the key blade (p. 169) in the bot- tom of the compartment.

Search for a spring-loaded button down in the hole with the key blade; depress the but- ton with the blade and hold.

Move the gear selector from the P position and pull up the key blade.

4. Set the rubber mat back in place.

9 The illustration is schematic. 10 There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.288

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)

Hill start assist (HSA)*11

The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.

The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal.

The temporary braking effect releases after sev- eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.

Related information Starting the engine (p. 276)

All-wheel drive - (AWD)* Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel drive.

All Wheel Drive is always available

All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time.

The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An electronically con- trolled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving condi- tions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

11 Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 289

Related information Hill Descent Control (HDC)* (p. 289)

Hill Descent Control (HDC)*12

HDC can be compared to an automatic engine brake. When you release the accelerator on downhill gradients the car is normally braked by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But the steeper the roadway and the more load in the car, the faster the car coasts despite engine braking - the HDC function compensates for this with automatic brake intervention.

General information on HDC HDC makes it possible to increase/reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake. The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal decreases and becomes more precise by means of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine speed within a limited range. The brake system brakes itself and provides the car with a low and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully focus on steering.

HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients with an uneven road surface and slippery sec- tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer from a ramp.

WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

Function

HDC On/Off.

HDC is activated or deactivated with one of the centre console's switches. The lamp within it illu- minates when the function is activated.

When HDC is operating, the combined instrument panel's symbol illuminates

combined with the text message Hill descent control ON.

12 Only possible on the V60 Cross Country with AWD.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.290

With manual transmission, the function works only on first gear and reverse gear.

With automatic transmission, gear 1 must be selected in manual gearshift mode (+S-), or R must be selected. This is indicated by the number 1 or R in the combined instrument panel, see Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284).

NOTE

HDC cannot be activated on an automatic gearbox when the gear selector is in position D.

Operation HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of 10 km/h (6 mph) forwards with engine braking and 7 km/h (4 mph) backwards. However, any speed within the gear's speed register can be selected using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to 10 or 7 km/h (6 or 4 mph) respec- tively, irrespective of the hill's gradient and with- out the need for the foot brake.

The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating. The driver can brake or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake.

HDC is deactivated:

with the centre console's On/Off button

if a gear other than 1 or R is selected on a manual gearbox

if a gear other than 1 or R is selected in manual gearshift mode on an automatic gearbox.

The function can be disengaged at any time. If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly, but slowly instead.

NOTE

With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response.

Related information All-wheel drive - (AWD)* (p. 288)

Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)

Manual gearbox (p. 282)

Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to continue.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpora- tion's core values and it influences all of our operations. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.

General information on Start/Stop

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and cleaner.

The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 291

conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop automati- cally, whenever appropriate.

The car's MY CAR menu system, under the DRIVe heading, contains information about Vol- vo's Start/Stop system, as well as recommenda- tions for energy-saving driving techniques.

Manual gearbox or automatic gearbox Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.

Related information Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Start/Stop* - function and operation The Start/Stop function is activated automati- cally when the engine is started with the key.

The Start/Stop function is acti- vated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of this by the function's symbol illuminating in the combined instrument panel and the On/Off button lamp illuminat- ing.

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the func- tion temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine The following is required for the engine to auto- stop:

Conditions M/AA

Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.

M

Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the pedal - the engine stops automatically.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If the ECO function is activated then the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.

For certain engine variants the engine may auto- stop before the car is stationary regardless of whether the ECO function is activated.

When the engine is auto-stopped, the combined instrument panel's symbol for the Start/Stop function illuminates.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.292

Auto-starting the engine

Conditions M/A A

With the gear lever in neutral position:

1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal - the engine starts.

2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.

M

Release the foot pressure on the foot brake - the engine starts automatically and the journey can continue.

A

Maintain foot pressure on the foot brake and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts.

A

The following option is also available on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automati- cally when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

M + A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.

Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off but- ton's lamp extinguishing.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automatically.

The engine does not auto-stop if:

Conditions M/AA

the car has not first achieved approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after a key start or the last auto-stop.

M + A

the driver has opened the seatbelt's buckle.

M + A

the capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level.

M + A

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

M + A

ambient temperature is around freez- ing point or above approx. 30 C.

M + A

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

M + A

the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the preset values - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

M + A

the car is reversed. M + A

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 293

Conditions M/AA

the starter battery temperature is below the freezing point or is too high.

M + A

the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is reactivated as soon as an automatic cleaning cycle has been performed (see Diesel parti- cle filter (DPF) (p. 314)).

M + A

the road is very steep. M + A

a trailer is connected electrically to the cars electrical system.

M + A

the bonnet has been openedB. M + A

the gearbox does not have normal operating temperature.

A

the atmospheric air pressure is less than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres above sea level - the current air pres- sure varies with the prevailing weather conditions.

A

Conditions M/AA

adaptive cruise control Queue Assist is activated.

A

the gear selector is in R, S positionC

or "+/-". A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.

In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. M + A

The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset values.

M + A

There is a temporarily high current take-off or starter battery capacity drops below the lowest permissible level.

M + A

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

M + A

The bonnet is openedB. M + A

The car starts to roll, or there is a small increase in speed if the car auto-stopped without being com- pletely stationary.

M + A

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.294

Conditions M/AA

The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N posi- tion.

A

Steering wheel movementsB. A

The gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionC, R or "+/-".

A

The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message inform that the Start/Stop function is active.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.

WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may sud- denly start automatically. First switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start The engine does not always auto-start after hav- ing auto-stopped.

In the following cases the engine does not auto- start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions M/A A

A gear is engaged without declutching - a display text prompts the driver to set the gear lever in neutral position in order to enable auto-start.

M

The driver is unrestrained. M

The driver is unrestrained, the gear selector is in P position and the drivers door is open - a normal engine start must take place.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 295

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox

If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed in accordance with the below:

1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked in the seatbelt buckle.

2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.

3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p. 296)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.296

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text messages in the combined instrument panel.

Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may show text messages in the combined instrument

panel for certain situations. For some of them

there is a recommended action that should be performed. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Auto Start/Stop Service required

Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. M + A

Autostart Engine running + acoustic signal

Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D posi- tion.

A

Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

M + A

Depress clutch pedal to start The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Depress brake and clutch pedals to start

The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed. M

Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position. M

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 297

Symbol Message Info/Action M/AA

Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

A

Press start button The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button and the gear selector in P or N.

A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If a message does not go out following comple- tion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

Related information Start/Stop* (p. 290)

Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 291)

Starting the engine (p. 276)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start (p. 294)

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 293)

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p. 292)

Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gear- box (p. 295)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.298

Drive mode ECO* ECO is an innovative Volvo function for auto- matic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel consumption by up to 5 %, depending on the driver's driving style. The function gives the driver the option of a more active environmentally con- scious way of driving.

General The following are changed upon activation of the ECO function:

Gearbox gearshift points.

Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal.

Start/Stop function - the engine can also auto-stop before the car has stopped down to being completely stationary.

The Eco Coast function is activated - engine braking ceases.

Climate control system settings - some elec- tricity consumers are deactivated or operate at reduced power.

NOTE

When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain set- tings can be reset manually, but full function- ality is only restored by deactivating the ECO function.

ECO - Operation

ECO On/Off

ECO symbol

The ECO function is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. There are exceptions for certain engines. However, it is easily verified by means of both the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO

button lamp illuminating when the function is activated.

ECO function On or Off Disengaged ECO function is indicated by the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp extin- guishing. The function is then switched off until it is reactiva- ted with the ECO button.

Eco Coast - Function The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with minimum consump- tion.

This function is intended for use in the event of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to coast into a zone with a lower speed limit.

Eco Coast enables proactive driving where the driver can use the so-called "Pulse & Glide" technique and a minimum of braking.

A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily deactivated ECO function can also collectively contribute to reduced consumption. Accordingly:

STARTING AND DRIVING

299

Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without engine braking = Low consumption

and

Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting with engine braking = Minimum consump- tion.

NOTE

However, to achieve optimal low fuel con- sumption, Eco Coast in combination with short coasting distances should generally be avoided.

Activating Eco Coast The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:

ECO button activated

Gear selector in D position

Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)

The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%.

Deactivate Eco Coast In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti- vate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such situations include:

on steep downhill gradients - to be able to use engine braking.

before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to complete it in the saf- est possible way.

Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine braking can be performed as follows:

Press the ECO button.

Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-" posi- tion.

Change gear with the steering wheel paddle shifters.

Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.

Eco Coast - Limitations The function is not available if:

cruise control is activated

the road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%

manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddle shifters*

engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature

the gear selector is moved from D- to "S+/-" position

speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph)

More information and settings

The car's menu system MY CAR contains further information on the ECO concept - see the sec- tion MY CAR (p. 115).

Related information General information on climate control

(p. 126)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.300

Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.

The car is equipped with two brake circuits for safety reasons. If a brake circuit is damaged then the brake pedal will engage deeper and a higher pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

If the foot brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car.

For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 288)* function, the pedal returns more slowly than usual to normal position if the car is parked on a gradient or on an uneven surface.

In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up.

For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving condi- tions (p. 413).

Braking on wet roads When driving for a long time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then nec- essary to depress the brake harder. For this rea- son, maintain a greater distance to the traffic ahead.

Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads and after a car wash. The brake discs are then warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected against corrosion. Take the prevailing traffic sit- uation into account when braking.

Braking on salted roads When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. This may extend braking distance. For this reason, keep an extra-large safety distance to the vehicle ahead. Also make sure of the following:

Brake occasionally to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking.

Gently depress the brake pedal when driving is finished and before the next journey starts.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres. Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom- mends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo.

IMPORTANT

The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo work- shop is recommended.

STARTING AND DRIVING

301

Symbols and messages

Symbol Specification

Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information Parking brake (p. 303)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 302)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 301)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from lock- ing up during braking.

The function allows the steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor- mal.

A short test of the ABS system is made automat- ically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto- matic test of the ABS system may be made at low speed. The test may be experienced as pul- ses in the brake pedal.

Related information Foot brake (p. 300)

Parking brake (p. 303)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 302)

STARTING AND DRIVING

302

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func- tion means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h (31 mph) in the event of heavy braking. After the car's speed has been slowed down to below 10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the car's hazard warning lights (p. 98) are activated. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the hazard warning lights.

Related information Foot brake (p. 300)

Parking brake (p. 303)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance (p. 302)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 301)

Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance.

EBA detects the driver's braking style and increa- ses the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Related information Foot brake (p. 300)

Parking brake (p. 303)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 302)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p. 301)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

303

Parking brake The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.

Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-controlled parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.

If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.

Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Con- nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting with another battery (p. 281).

Applying the parking brake

Parking brake control - apply.

1. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

2. Press the parking brake control.

> The combined instrument panel's symbol starts flashing - once there is a constant glow the parking brake is applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selec- tor in position P (for automatic gearbox).

Emergency brake In an emergency the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the parking brake control. The brak-

ing procedure is stopped when the control is released.

NOTE

An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:

Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

304

Disengaging the parking brake

Parking brake control - release.

Cars with manual gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch13.

2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

3. Apply the parking brake control.

> The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.

NOTE

The parking brake can also be released man- ually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends that the brake pedal is used.

Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.

2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.

3. Ease up the clutch and depress the acceler- ator.

> The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.

Cars with automatic gearbox

Releasing manually 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition

switch13.

2. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

3. Pull the control.

> The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.

4. Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator.

> The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.

NOTE

For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The park- ing brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while driving off. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.

13 For cars with keyless start and lock system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

305

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electric park- ing brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended.

Symbols and messages For information on how the combined instrument panel's text messages can be shown and deleted, see Messages - handling (p. 114).

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

"Message" Read the combined instrument panel's message.

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.

If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.

Read the combined instrument panel's message.

Handbrake not fully released

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

306

Symbol Message Meaning/Action

Handbrake not applied

A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:

Try to release and apply the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.

Handbrake Service required

A fault has arisen:

Try to apply and release the brake.

If the fault persists after a few attempts:

Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the car has to be parked before a possible fault has been rectified, then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox).

A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Related information Foot brake (p. 300)

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 307

Driving in water Driving in water means that the car is driven through deep water on a water-covered road- way. Fording must be carried out with great cau- tion.

The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm (30 cm with V60 Cross Country) at a maximum speed of walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised when passing through flowing water.

During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec- tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In depths greater than 25 cm (30 cm with V60 Cross Country), water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems.

Damage to any component, engine, transmis- sion, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty.

In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.

Related information Recovery (p. 326)

Towing (p. 324)

Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driv- ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer* (p. 317).

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument pan- el's information display and a text message High engine temperature Stop safely is shown there - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.

If the text message High engine temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant level low Stop safely is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

In the event of overheating in the gearbox a built-in protection function is activated which, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol in the combined instrument panel, and its display shows the text message Transmission hot Reduce speed or Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling - follow the recommendation given and lower the speed and stop the car in a

STARTING AND DRIVING

308

safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Driving with open tailgate/boot lid When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.

WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Related information Loading (p. 154)

Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery (p. 377) to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position II (p. 81) when the car is switched off. Instead use position I - which uses less power.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

headlamps

windscreen wiper

audio system (high volume).

If the starter battery voltage is low then the com- bined instrument panel's information display shows the text Low battery charge Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

STARTING AND DRIVING

309

Before a long journey Before a long journey, it makes good sense to go through the following points:

Check that the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption (p. 422) is nor- mal.

Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid).

Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.

Carrying a warning triangle (p. 341) is a legal requirement in certain countries.

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 337)

Lamp replacement - general (p. 365)

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform cer- tain checks in order to ensure that the car can be driven safely.

Check the following in particular before the cold season:

The engine coolant (p. 362) must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 C. To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed.

The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.

Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel con- sumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 413).

IMPORTANT

Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter

battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.

Use washer fluid (p. 376) to avoid ice form- ing in the washer fluid reservoir.

To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom- mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE

The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.

Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con- trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

Related information Winter driving (p. 309)

STARTING AND DRIVING

310

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as fol- lows:

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is released.

In the combined instrument panel's dis- play the arrow on the symbol indicates

which side of the car the fuel cap is located.

Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a click confirms that it is closed.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 310)

Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compart- ment is not possible.

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).

2. Expand/open a perforated section in the iso- lation and locate a green cord with handle.

3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".

IMPORTANT

Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 310)

Filling up with fuel Important things to consider when refuelling.

Opening/closing the fuel cap

The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.

A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures. Open the cap slowly.

After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it until one or more clicking sounds are heard.

STARTING AND DRIVING

311

Filling up with fuel 1. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the

car in accordance with the identifier14 on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

See information on approved fuels in the respective section on petrol (p. 312) and diesel (p. 313).

2. Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.

NOTE

Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Filling with a fuel can15

When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the cover before filling can begin.

Related information Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 310)

Fuel - handling (p. 311)

Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.

WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi- cal attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe- thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten- tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.

WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni- ted.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

IMPORTANT

Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

Related information Fuel - diesel (p. 313)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 314)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 419)

14 The identifier, in accordance with the CEN standard prEN16942, is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

15 Only applies to a car with diesel engine.

STARTING AND DRIVING

312

Fuel - petrol Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine.

Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard.

Identifier for petrol The identifier16 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:

E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7 % oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol.

E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7 % oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol.

IMPORTANT

Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted.

EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use.

Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per- mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.

Octane rating 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recom- mended for optimum performance and fuel econ- omy.

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- ing the catalytic converter.

Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used.

Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 311)

Economical driving (p. 316)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 419)

16 In accordance with CEN standard prEN16942.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

313

Fuel - diesel Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a diesel engine.

Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul- phur and metals.

Identifier The identifier17 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will soon (within two years) be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe.

This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine:

B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME).

At low temperatures (lower than 0 C) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may

lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but in the event of extreme weather condi- tions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refu- elling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paint- work. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.

IMPORTANT

Diesel fuel must:

fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 standards

have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg

have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME18

(B7).

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Special additives

Marine diesel fuel

Heating oil

FAME19 and vegetable oil.

These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Empty tank Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva- tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position. For more information, see Key positions (p. 81).

2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.

3. Wait approx. one minute.

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.

17 CEN standard prEN16942. 18 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester 19 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

314

NOTE

Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter20

The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.

For optimum performance, it is important to fol- low the service intervals for fuel filter change as well as to use genuine parts developed specifi- cally for this purpose.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel. For more information, see Volvo service programme (p. 352).

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 311)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 314)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

Diesel particle filter (DPF) Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission control.

The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel con- sumption may increase slightly during regenera- tion.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approx. 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in the combined instrument panel, and the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in its information display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motorway.

20 Applicable to five-cylinder engines only.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 315

The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

The following may arise during regeneration:

a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily

fuel consumption may increase temporar- ily

a smell of burning may arise.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

IMPORTANT

If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the fil- ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 311)

Fuel - diesel (p. 313)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 419) Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ rhodium/palladium. These metals act as cata- lysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up them- selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy. For more information, see Fuel con- sumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422).

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that contin- uously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal con- ditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Related information Fuel - petrol (p. 312)

Fuel - diesel (p. 313)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.316

Economical driving Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv- ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing condi- tions.

Use the ECO Guide* which indicates how fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 70).

For lower fuel consumption, activate Drive mode ECO21.

Use the Eco Coast22 freewheel function - engine braking will cease and the car's kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for longer distances.

Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consump- tion. Use the gear indicator (p. 283)23.

Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis- tance to other vehicles and objects to mini- mise braking.

High speed results in increased fuel con- sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.

Do not run the engine to operating tempera- ture at idling speed, but rather drive with a normal load right after starting - a cold

engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427).

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Do not use winter tyres when the winter sea- son is over.

Remove unnecessary items from the car - the greater the load the higher the fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

A roof load and space box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher consumption - remove the load carriers when not in use.

Avoid driving with open windows.

For information about Volvo Car Corporation's environmental philosophy, see Environmental phi- losophy (p. 22).

For more information about fuel consumption, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422).

WARNING Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

Related information Fuel - handling (p. 311)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

Fuel tank - volume (p. 419)

21 Applies to automatic gearbox. 22 See "Drive mode ECO". 23 Applies to manual gearbox.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 317

Driving with a trailer* When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to think about regarding e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer.

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay- load by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information, see Weights (p. 410).

If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For informa- tion on the tyre pressure, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427).

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regula- tions in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument pan- el's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster than normal and the information display shows the text Trailer indicator malfunction.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Trailer brake light malfunction text is shown.

Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.

Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 411).

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.318

Related information Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox

(p. 318)

Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox (p. 318)

Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 319)

Lamp replacement - general (p. 365)

Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Related information Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

In the event of overheating a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel with a message that is shown in the information display - follow the recommenda- tion given.

Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic transmission in a

higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory. 319

Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

Related information Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 284)

Towing bracket/Towbar* A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.

If the car is equipped with a detachable/remova- ble towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 321).

WARNING If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions care- fully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks The towbar's towball must be cleaned and

greased regularly.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball.

Related information Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

STARTING AND DRIVING

* Option/accessory.320

Detachable towbar* - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car.

Related information Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 320)

Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal (p. 321)

Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

Detachable towbar* - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.

Specifications

G 0 2 1 4 8 5

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

A 998

B 81

C 854

D 427

E 109

F 282

G Side member

H Ball centre

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 321

Related information Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal

(p. 321)

Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 320)

Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

Detachable towbar* - attachment/ removal The attachment/removal of the detachable tow- bar is performed in the following way:

Attaching

G 0 1 8 9 2 8

Remove the protective cover by first pressing

in the catch and then pulling the cover

straight back .

G 0 2 1 4 8 7

Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.

G 0 2 1 4 8 8

The indicator window must show red.

G 0 2 1 4 8 9

Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

322

G 0 2 1 4 9 0

The indicator window must show green.

G 0 0 0 0 0 0

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

G 0 2 1 4 9 4

Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.

NOTE

When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

G 0 2 1 4 9 5

Safety cable.

WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.

Removing the towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

* Option/accessory. 323

Push in the locking wheel and turn it

anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 320).

G 0 1 8 9 2 9

Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.

Related information Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 320)

Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 320)

Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

Trailer Stability Assist - TSA24

The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.

TSA- the function is included in the stability sys-

tem (p. 191) ESC25.

Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.

In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:

Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind.

Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur- face or in a pothole.

Sweeping steering wheel movements.

Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.

The trailer stability assist function continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

324

wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta- bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car.

If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer combi- nation is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu- ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. For more information, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation (p. 192).

Miscellaneous Engagement of TSA may take place at higher speeds.

NOTE

TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general (p. 191).

TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses sudden steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because, in such a situation, the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.

The ESC25 symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes when the TSA system is working.

Related information Electronic stability control (ESC) - general

(p. 191)

Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins.

1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.

2. Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.

3. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/STOP ENGINE button - key position II is activated, see Key positions (p. 81) for more informa- tion about key positions.

4. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

5. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi- cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen- tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

6. Be prepared to brake to stop.

24 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar. 25 (Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.

STARTING AND DRIVING

}}

325

WARNING

Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing.

The remote control key must be in key position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

WARNING The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox Prior to towing:

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic Prior to towing:

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Do not tow cars with automatic transmis- sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km.

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting with another battery (p. 281).

IMPORTANT

The catalytic converter may be damaged dur- ing attempts to tow-start the engine.

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 98)

Towing eye (p. 325)

Recovery (p. 326)

Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Attaching the towing eye

Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

||

STARTING AND DRIVING

326

The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:

Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turn- ing it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.

The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance deter- mine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.

WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

Related information Towing (p. 324)

Recovery (p. 326)

Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transported away by means of another vehicle.

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance deter- mine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.

WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.

STARTING AND DRIVING

327

Related information Towing (p. 324)

WHEELS AND TYRES

WHEELS AND TYRES

330

Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.

Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteris- tics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undam- aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially impor- tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig- its in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.

Summer and winter wheels When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Wear and maintenance Correct tyre pressure (p. 332) results in more even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear.

To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre- vent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suita- ble distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differ- ences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possi- ble complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

Storage Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying down or hanging up - never standing up.

WHEELS AND TYRES

331

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 331)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 332)

Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

G 0 2 1 7 7 8

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

NOTE

Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures speci- fied in the tyre pressure table (p. 427).

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 330)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 332)

WHEELS AND TYRES

332

Tyres - tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth.

G 0 2 1 8 2 9

Tread wear indicators.

A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 331)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 330) Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.

Check the air pressure in the tyres The tyre pressures must be checked every month.

WHEELS AND TYRES

333

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre dimension.

ECO pressure1.

Check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also var- ies depending on ambient temperature.

Tyre pressure label

G 0 2 1 8 3 0

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427).

Fuel economy, ECO pressure When carrying a light load (max. 3 people) and at speeds of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressure can be selected to give the best possi- ble fuel economy. If the best possible noise and travelling comfort conditions are sought, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead.

(See approved tyre pressures(p. 427).)

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 330)

Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 332)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427)

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

WHEELS AND TYRES

334

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below.

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that certain combinations of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved.

Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.

7 Rim width in inches

J Rim flange profile

16 Rim diameter in inches

50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel cen- tre to wheel contact surface against the hub)

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427)

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions (p. 425)

Tyres - dimensions The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the examples in the table below.

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.

215 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

97 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 270 km/h (168 mph).)

The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

Related information Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 331)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 330)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 334)

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions (p. 425)

Load index and speed rating (p. 426)

WHEELS AND TYRES

335

Tyres - load index Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load.

Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. Lowest per- missible index is specified in the tyre load index table, see section "Specifications" in the printed owner's manual.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

Tyres - maintenance (p. 330)

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions (p. 425)

Tyres - speed ratings Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).

Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below indicates the maximum permitted speed that applies for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is the winter tyre (p. 336)2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.

Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on win- ter tyres)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

W 270 km/h (168 mph)

Y 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 335) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 331)

2 Both those with metal studs and those without.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.336

Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different versions.

IMPORTANT

The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts.

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

Locking wheel bolts* Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alumi- nium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.

Related information Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 334)

Winter tyres Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera- tures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-

mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Using snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Never drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph) with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncer- tainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 337)

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 337

Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter wheels/winter tyres.

Spare wheel* Two different versions of the spare wheel can be supplied, in a bag or beneath the cargo floor.

The following instructions only apply if a spare wheel has been purchased as an accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped with a spare wheel - see information about Emer- gency puncture repair (TMK) (p. 345).

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possi- ble. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clear- ance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all- wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired.

The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 427).

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The same bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel and the foam block. The foam block contains all the tools nee- ded to change the wheels.

The spare wheel is supplied in a bag and must be secured on the cargo area floor using straps.

Cars with four load retaining eyelets.

Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets. Attach the long strap into one of the front load retaining

eyelets, run the strap diagonally over the spare wheel and through the upper handle. Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the long one. Attach the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.

Taking out the spare wheel in the bag 1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel

from the cargo area and remove it from the spare wheel bag.

2. Fold up the cargo area floor.

3. Lift the tools and jack out from the foam block.

Removing Set up warning triangle (p. 341) if a wheel is replaced in trafficked location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface.

1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 303) and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.338

WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

2. Take out jack*, wheel wrench*, removal tool for wheel covers* and plastic wheel bolt cap removal tool. They will be found in the foam block. If another jack is selected, see Raising the car (p. 355).

Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alterna- tively, the wheel covers can be pulled away by hand.

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 339

5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* to the stop position.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye must be screwed all the way into the wheel bolt wrench.

6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool.

7. Loosen the wheel bolts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench*.

WARNING Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

8. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. Wind up the jack* so that the flange in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the head of the jack.

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec- ommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equip- ment.

Related information Changing wheels - fitting (p. 340)

Jack* (p. 342)

Warning triangle (p. 341)

Wheel bolts (p. 336)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.340

Changing wheels - fitting It is important that the procedure for fitting the wheel is carried out correctly.

Installation

WARNING Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passen- gers must stand in a safe place.

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly.

Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the tor- que with a torque wrench.

5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.

6. Refit any full wheel covers.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

NOTE

The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be positioned over the valve on the wheel rim during fitting.

When changing to another tyre dimension Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat- ing the software at each change of tyre dimen- sion. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimen- sions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 337)

Jack* (p. 342)

Warning triangle (p. 341)

Wheel bolts (p. 336)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory. 341

Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.

Storage and folding up

Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle.

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

Tools Amongst other things, the car contains towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.

Located under the cargo area floor are the car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is also space here for the sleeve for the locking wheel bolts and tools for the plastic wheel bolt caps.

Related information Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Towing eye (p. 325)

Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 337)

Wheel bolts (p. 336)

Jack* (p. 342)

WHEELS AND TYRES

* Option/accessory.342

Jack* Use the jack to raise the car when changing a wheel.

The original jack should only be used for chang- ing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

NOTE

The normal car jack is only designed for occa- sional, short-term use, such as when chang- ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win- ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the specific car model may be used to raise the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec- ommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equip- ment.

Tools - returning into place

The tools and jack* must be returned to their cor- rect places after use. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

Related information Warning triangle (p. 341)

Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

First aid kit* The first aid box contains first aid equipment.

A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

* Option/accessory. 343

Tyre pressure monitoring*3

The tyre pressure monitoring system warns with an indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car's tyres.

For certain markets the tyre pressure monitoring is standard in accordance with legal require- ments. The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.

Indicator symbol for tyre pressure monitoring.

Related information Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 343)

Tyre monitoring (TM)*4

The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses tyre rota- tion speed in order to determine whether the tyres have the correct tyre pressure.

System description If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

The system does not replace normal tyre mainte- nance.

Messages If the tyre pressure is too low then an indicator

symbol ( ) illuminates in the combined instru- ment panel and one of the following messages is shown:

Tyre pressure low Check, adjust and calibrate

Tyre pressure system Service required

Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable

IMPORTANT

If a fault occurs in the TM system the indica-

tor symbol in the combined instrument panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. A message is also shown in the combined instrument panel.

3 Standard in certain markets. 4 Standard in certain markets.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

344

Deleting the messages 1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a

tyre pressure gauge.

2. Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors).

3. Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR.

NOTE

To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kil- ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases.

WARNING

Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car.

The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance.

TM calibration In order for TM system to work correctly, a refer- ence value for the tyre pressure must be deter- mined. This must be done each time the tyres are

changed or the tyre pressure is adjusted by reca- librating the system in MY CAR.

For example, the tyre pressure should be adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)). Following which, the system must be recalibrated.

Recalibration Settings are made using the centre console's controls, see MY CAR (p. 115).

1. Stop the engine.

2. Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear doors).

Or see the tyre pressure table.

3. Start the engine and let the car stand still.

4. Open the menu system MY CAR and select the menu Tyre monitor.

5. Select Start calibration and press OK.

6. Press OK after all tyres have been checked and adjusted in order to start calibration.

7. Drive the car.

> Recalibration is carried out automatically while the car is being driven and can be interrupted at any time. If the engine is switched off while recalibration is in pro- gress then it is resumed when the car is driven again. The system provides no con- firmation when the calibration is complete.

The new reference value applies until steps 1-7 are repeated.

NOTE

Remember that the TM system must be reca- librated at each tyre change or if the tyre pressure is adjusted. If new reference values are not stored then the system cannot func- tion properly.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

WHEELS AND TYRES

345

System and tyre status The current status of the system and the tyres can be checked in the centre console's screen.

1. Open the menu system MY CAR.

2. Select the Tyre monitor menu.

> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a colour code.

The status is colour-coded for each tyre in accordance with the following:

All-green: the system is operating normally and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly above the recommended level.

Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure is too low.

All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have pressure that is too low.

All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Currently unavailable: the tyre pressure system is temporarily deac- tivated. It may be necessary to drive the car for a short time above 30 km/h (20 mph) before the system becomes active again.

All wheels grey and the message Tyre pressure system Service required: an error has occurred in the system. Contact a Volvo dealer or workshop.

Related information Tyres - air pressure (p. 332)

Emergency puncture repair The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 427).

The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 346) con- sists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency punc- ture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

NOTE

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit - location

(p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair - operation (p. 347)

Tools (p. 341)

WHEELS AND TYRES

346

Emergency puncture repair kit - location The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure.

Location of the emergency puncture repair kit

The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area.

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit - overview

(p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview Overview of the component parts of the emer- gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

Label, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Electrical cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing fluid bottle Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the expiration date has passed and after use. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

WARNING The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi- ately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

347

Related information Emergency puncture repair kit - location

(p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Emergency puncture repair - operation Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).

Emergency puncture repair

For information on the function of the parts, see Emer- gency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 346).

1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.

If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi- lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole.

2. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0, and take out the electrical cable and the air hose.

4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the bottle.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

348

5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot- tle holder.

> The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo work- shop.

WARNING

In the event of skin contact with the seal- ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.

Sealing fluid that makes contact with an eye must be rinsed away immediately with eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the discomfort persists then the eye should be examined by a doctor.

WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.

Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

7. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

NOTE

Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock- ets is in use when the compressor is operat- ing.

WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre cen- tre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres- sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres- sure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)

WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the electrical cable.

12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre.

13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid.

WHEELS AND TYRES

}}

349

14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

NOTE

Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre.

WARNING Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The dis- tance should be at least two metres.

15. Follow-up inspection:

Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve again and check the tyre pressure with the pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture repair - rechecking (p. 349).

Related information Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Emergency puncture repair - rechecking (p. 349)

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair - rechecking When a tyre has been sealed with the emer- gency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK), a subsequent check must be made after approx. 3 kilometres of driving.

Check tyre pressure Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The com- pressor must be switched off.

1. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.

Take out the air hose and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar5 then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The jour- ney should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar5, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427).

Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

3. If the tyre needs to be inflated:

1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table.

3. Switch off the compressor.

4. Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the protective cap on the air hose and fold the hose in the box.

WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

NOTE

After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.

Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

5 1 bar = 100 kPa.

||

WHEELS AND TYRES

350

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

WARNING Check the tyre pressure regularly.

Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Related information Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Emergency puncture repair - operation (p. 347)

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair kit - inflating the tyres The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 346).

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and take out the electrical cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

3. Plug the electrical cable into the closest 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable.

7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.

Related information Emergency puncture repair (p. 345)

Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 346)

Emergency puncture repair - rechecking (p. 349)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.352

Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and mainte- nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 365)

Book service and repair*1

Manage service, repair and booking information directly in your Internet-connected car.

This service1 provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car information is sent to your dealer, who can pre- pare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact you to schedule an appointment time. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navi- gation system2 can also guide you to the work- shop when the time comes.

Before the service can be used

Volvo ID and my profile Register a Volvo ID. For more information

and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID (p. 21).

Log in to the owner portal My Volvo, go to your profile and carry out the following:

1. Check that the car is connected to your pro- file.

2. Check that your contact information is cor- rect.

3. Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact for service and repair.

4. Choose preferred communication channel (phone). Booking information is always sent to the car and to you via email.

Prerequisite for booking from car To send and receive booking information

from and to the car, the car must be con- nected to the Internet, see the Sensus Info- tainment supplement for information about how to connect the car to the Internet.

Since the booking information is sent over your private phone subscription, you will be asked whether you want to send the informa- tion. The question is asked once and then applies to the selected connection for a lim- ited time.

For the service to work and for the system to communicate via the car's screen, notifica- tions/pop-up messages must be accepted. In the normal view for the MY CAR source, press OK/MENU and then Service & repair

Display notifications.

Using the service All menus and settings are accessed from the normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU and then Service & repair.

When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, this is notified

1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

353

in the combined instrument panel (p. 66) and via a pop-up menu in the screen.

Service message in the screen.

Meaning of the answer options in the screen's pop-up menu:

Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your dealer who then comes back with a booking proposal. The service lamp and service mes- sage in the combined instrument panel are extinguished.

No - No more pop-up messages will be shown in the screen. The message in the combined instrument panel remains. After this option has been selected, it is possible to start the manual booking in the car, see below.

Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the next time the car is started.

Book a service or repair manually1

1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre con-

sole and select Service & repair Dealer

information Request service or repair.

> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your dealer.

2. The dealer sends a booking proposal to the car.

3. Accept or request a new booking proposal.

After the booking has been accepted the book- ing information is stored in the car, see My book- ings. The car will automatically communicate with you via the screen by means of reminders about the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.

You can also book a workshop visit via My Volvo. Go to "My bookings" and select "Update" in order to gain access to bookings from My Volvo.

My bookings1

Show booking information in the car's screen. Accept or request a new booking proposal.

Select Service & repair My bookings.

Call the dealer1

With a Bluetooth phone connected to the car, you can call your dealer. For connecting the phone, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Call dealer.

Using the navigation system1, 2

Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint in the navigation system.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Set single destination.

Select Service & repair Dealer

information Add as waypoint.

Sending vehicle data1

Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database (not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can retrieve vehicle information using the car's identi- fication number (VIN3). The number is printed in the car's service and warranty booklet, alterna- tively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand corner.

Select Service & repair Send car data.

1 Applies to certain markets. 2 Applies to Sensus Navigation. 3 Vehicle Identification Number

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

354

Booking information and vehicle data When you decide to book a service from your car, the booking information and vehicle data will be sent. Vehicle data information consists of infor- mation within the following areas:

service requirement

function status

fluid levels

Meter reading

the car's vehicle identification number (VIN3)

The car's software version.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 21)

3 Vehicle Identification Number

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

355

Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

356

Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).

If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then this must be positioned under one of the four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi- tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be posi- tioned under the outer lifting points (jacking points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front.

Related information Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 337)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

357

Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle in the passenger compartment has been turned clockwise and the lock by the radiator grille has been moved to the left.

The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left- hand side.

Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clock- wise. You will hear when the catch releases.

Move the catch to the left and open the bon- net. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)

WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Related information Engine compartment - checking (p. 358)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 357)

Engine compartment - overview The overview shows some service-related com- ponents.

Engine compartment 4-cyl.

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.

Engine oil filler pipe

Coolant expansion tank

Radiator

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Washer fluid filler pipe

Air filter

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

358

WARNING The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different lev- els (p. 81).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Engine compartment 5-cyl. diesel

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant.

Coolant expansion tank

Power steering fluid reservoir

Engine oil filler pipe

Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side)

Starter battery

Relay and fuse box

Washer fluid filler pipe

WARNING The car's electrical system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 357)

Engine compartment - checking (p. 358)

Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regu- lar intervals.

Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:

Coolant

Engine oil

Power steering fluid (not cars with 4-cyl. engine)

Washer fluid

WARNING Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

Related information Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 357)

Engine compartment - overview (p. 357)

Coolant - level (p. 362)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360)

Power steering fluid - level (p. 364)

Washer fluid - filling (p. 376)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

359

Engine oil - general An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied.

Volvo recommends:

When driving under adverse conditions, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 413).

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting charac- teristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/ high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for

low oil pressure is used . Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is

informed via the instrument's warning symbol

and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per- mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 413).

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 414).

Related information Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

360

Engine oil - checking and filling The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor.

4-cyl.

Filler pipe4.

In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals.

No action needs to be taken on engine oil level until a message is shown in the combined instru- ment panel's display, see the following illustra- tion.

Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand dis- play is shown in the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand in the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.

IMPORTANT

If notified of low oil level, only fill with the vol- ume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct.

WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

361

Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl. If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the following sequence.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instru- ment panel (p. 112).

NOTE

If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, the message Not available will be shown. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

5-cyl. diesel

Filler pipe5.

No action needs to be taken on engine oil level until a message is shown in the combined instru- ment panel's display, see the following illustra- tion.

Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand dis- play is shown in the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand in the analogue.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 112).

WARNING

If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high.

5 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

362

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

WARNING Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the following sequence.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level. > Information is then displayed on the

engine's oil level; see the following illus- tration, which shows the message and graphic in the display. The left-hand dis- play is shown in the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand in the analogue.

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined instru- ment panel (p. 112).

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4.

Related information Engine oil - general (p. 359)

Coolant - level The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger com- partment.

Checking the level The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling system is not filled sufficiently, excessively high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of dam- age to the engine.

NOTE

Check the coolant level regularly when the engine is cold.

Filling

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

363

When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc- tions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool- ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage when starting due to a defective cooling system.

WARNING Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera- tures that are too high may occur result- ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 416).

Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.

Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly.

Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent brak- ing, such as driving in mountains or tropical cli- mates with high humidity.

For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 418).

WARNING If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- ommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

364

Filling

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.

The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached.

Turn and open the cover located on the cov- ering.

Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.

IMPORTANT

Do not forget to refit the cap.

Power steering fluid - level Cars with 4-cyl. engine do not have power steer- ing fluid. For cars with another engine, the level of the power steering fluid must be between the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks. The fluid does not need to be changed.

IMPORTANT

Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover must not be opened.

Check the level frequently. The fluid does not require changing. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

For recommended fluid grade, see Power steer- ing fluid - grade (p. 418).

WARNING If there is a fault in the power steering system or if the engine is switched off and the car has to be towed, the steering is much heavier than normal. Read about what applies for tow- ing (p. 324).

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

365

Climate control system - fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system must only be serv- iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Fault tracing and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur- ing leak detection.

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Cars with R134a refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

Cars with R1234yf refrigerant

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Related information Volvo service programme (p. 352)

Lamp replacement - general Several of the car's bulbs can be replaced by the driver. For replacement of LED lamps and xenon lamps, please contact a workshop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 373). The following list contains locations of bulbs and other light sources that are specialised, such as LED6

6 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

366

lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some other reason, except at a workshop7:

active xenon headlamps - ABL (xenon lamps)

daytime running lights/position lamps, front

Cornering lights

side direction indicators, door mirrors

approach lighting, door mirrors

Interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting front

Position lamps, rear

side marker lamps

Brake light.

WARNING On cars with xenon headlamps, the replace- ment of xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the head- lamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.

WARNING The car's electrical system must be in key position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key posi- tions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

NOTE

If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 367)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps (p. 371)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting (p. 372)

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area (p. 372)

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting (p. 372)

7 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

367

Lamp replacement - headlamps All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp.

Removing the headlamp Set the car's electrical system in key position 0, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.

Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.

Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb.

At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.

5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

6. Replace the bulb in question.

Securing the headlamp

1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound should be heard.

2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins. The short pin is fitted closest to the radiator grille. Check that they are firmly inserted.

3. Check the lighting.

The headlamp must be mounted and the connec- tor firmly connected before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 365)

Lamp replacement - cover for main/dipped beam bulbs (p. 368)

Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

368

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 367).

1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be loos- ened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)

2. Slide the cover to one side.

3. Remove the cover.

Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Related information Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 367)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 368)

Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 369)

Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p. 370)

Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 367).

2. Remove the cover (p. 368).

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.

5. The guide pin on the lamp should be straight up when it is fitted and a clicking sound should be heard when it clicks into place.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

369

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the head- lamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 367).

2. Remove the cover (p. 368).

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.370

Lamp replacement - extra main beam The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 367).

2. Remove the cover (p. 368).

3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and then pulling straight out.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can only be secured in one position.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 367).

2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.

3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the bulb.

4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb anti- clockwise in order to detach it.

Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

371

Lamp replacement - rear lamp Bulbs for rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the cargo area.

Lamp housing, rear

The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and direc- tion indicator in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Open the panel.

2. Remove the insulation that is fitted in front of the bulb holder by pulling it straight out.

3. Press down the catch and pull out the bulb holder.

4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.

5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock- wise.

6. Press down the catch when the bulb holder is refitted.

7. Refit the insulation and panel.

Related information Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps

(p. 371)

Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps The overview shows the location of the lamps at the rear.

Brake light (LED)

Position lamps (LED)/Side marker lamps (LED)

Indicator (p. 371)

Brake light (LED)

Reversing lamp

Fog lamp

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 365)

Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

372

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting The number plate lighting is located under the tailgate handle.

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

2. Carefully detach the whole bulb housing and withdraw it.

3. Replace the bulb.

4. Refit the whole bulb housing and screw it into place.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area The cargo area lighting is located in the tailgate.

G 0 3 1 9 4 2

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Replace the bulb.

3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press back the lamp housing.

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.

Removal of lamp lens

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.

3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb straight out to the side and replace with a new one. Note! - Do not squeeze the bulb too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb glass could then break.

Attaching the lamp lens 1. Refit the lamp lens.

2. Press it into place.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

373

Related information Lamps - specifications (p. 373)

Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. For replace- ment of LED lamps and xenon lamps, please contact a workshop.

Lighting WA Type

Dipped beam, halo- gen

55 H7 LL

Main beam, halogen 65 H9

Extra main beam, ABL

65 H9

Front direction indi- cators

24 PY24W

Courtesy lighting front

3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Glovebox lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm

Vanity mirror light- ing

1.2 T5 Socket W2x4.6d

Cargo area lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm

Number plate light- ing

5 C5W LL

Direction indicators, rear

21 PY21W LL

Lighting WA Type

- - -

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL

A Watt

Related information Lamp replacement - general (p. 365)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

374

Wiper blades The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.

The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when they are to be replaced.

Service position

Wiper blades in service position.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example) they must be in service position.

IMPORTANT

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch8 and briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed infor- mation on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 81).

2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the cars electrical system in key position 0.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second.

> The wipers then move to standing straight up.

The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the wind- screen before the wipers are activated. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Replacing the wiper blades

8 Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

375

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm.

Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard.

Check that the blade is firmly installed.

4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind- screen.

The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the cars electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Angle the wiper blade out slightly from the wiper arm.

3. Grip the wiper arm and use force from your thumb to press the blade forwards (at the arrow) in order to detach the blade.

4. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that it is firmly installed.

5. Lower the wiper arm.

Cleaning For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see Car wash (p. 397).

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

376

IMPORTANT

Check the blades regularly. Neglected main- tenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Related information Washer fluid - filling (p. 376)

Washer fluid - filling Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is below freezing point.

Topping up the washer fluid takes place by open- ing the blue cap.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

NOTE

When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remaining in the reservoir, a message to top up the washer fluid will be shown in the com- bined instrument panel, together with the

symbol .

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point.

IMPORTANT

Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water).

IMPORTANT

Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid freez- ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

Volume:

Cars with headlamp washing: 5.4 litres.

Cars without headlamp washing: 4.0 litres.

Related information Wiper blades (p. 374)

Wipers and washers (p. 102)

Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 357)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

377

Starter battery - general The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.

The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi- tions, climatic conditions, etc.

Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running.

Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tight- ened.

Voltage (V) 12

Cold start capacityA - CCAB

(A) 720

Size, LWH (mm) 278175190

Capacity (Ah) 70

A In accordance with EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in cars with the Start/Stop function, a battery of EFB9 type must be fitted.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the support battery, a battery of AGM10 type must be fitted.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE

The starter battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimen- sions.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns.

If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention imme- diately.

IMPORTANT

When charging the starter battery or the sup- port battery (p. 380), only use a modern bat- tery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery.

9 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 10 Absorbed Glass Mat.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

378

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotain- ment system may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the combined instru- ment panel's information display about the starter battery's state of charge may be tem- porarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point.

See Jump starting with another battery (p. 281) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charg- ing.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 378)

Starter battery - replacement (p. 379)

Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the batteries.

Symbols on the batteries Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual for the car.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains corro- sive acid.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

379

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recycling.

NOTE

An expended starter battery or support bat- tery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner since it contains lead.

Related information Starter battery - general (p. 377)

Battery - Start/Stop (p. 380)

Starter battery - replacement The starter battery in the car can be replaced without the help of a workshop.

Removal First of all: Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched - this is because the car's electrical system needs to store the necessary information to control mod- ules.

Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.380

Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free.

Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING Connect and remove the positive and nega- tive cables in the correct order.

Detach the black negative cable.

Detach the red positive cable.

Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.

Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.

Move the battery aside.

Lift it up.

Fitting

1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box.

3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

4. Connect the ventilation hose.

> Check that it is correctly connected to both battery and outlet in the body.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section "Removal".)

8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)

9. Align the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See "Removal".)

For more information on the car's starter battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 377) and Jump starting with another battery (p. 281).

Battery - Start/Stop Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with a support battery in addition to the starter battery.

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful bat- tery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.

For more information on the Start/Stop function, see Start/Stop* (p. 290).

For more information on the car's starter battery, see Jump starting with another battery (p. 281).

The following table shows specifications for the starter battery and support battery respectively in cars with Start/Stop function.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

381

Battery

Start, 12 V Support, 12 V

Cold start capacityA

- CCAB

(A)

720C

760D

Left-hand drive car:

120E

170F

Right-hand drive car:

120

Size, LWH (mm)

278175190

Left-hand drive car:

15090106E

15090130F

Right-hand drive car:

15090106

Battery

Start, 12 V Support, 12 V

Capacity (Ah)

70

Left-hand drive car:

8E

10F

Right-hand drive car:

8

A In accordance with EN standard. B Cold Cranking Amperes. C Manual gearbox. D Automatic gearbox. E Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function that

only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary. F Others.

IMPORTANT

When replacing the starter battery in cars with the Start/Stop function, a battery of EFB11 type or stronger must be installed.

When replacing the support battery, a battery of AGM12 type must be fitted.

NOTE

The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption.

When the capacity of the starter battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is dis- engaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means:

The engine starts automatically13 without the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

The engine starts automatically without the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

11 Enhanced Flooded Battery. 12 Absorbed Glass Mat. 13 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

382

Location of the batteries

A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.

Starter battery14

Support battery

The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:

The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point.

See Jump starting with another battery (p. 281) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE

If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jump-started with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop function will continue to be activated. If the Start/Stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the opportunity to recharge.

If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of +15 C, the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside tempera- ture, the charging time may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger.

For more information on charging the starter battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 377).

Related information Battery - symbols (p. 378)

14 See Starter battery - general (p. 377) for detailed description of the starter battery.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

383

Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.

The size, type and performance of the starter bat- tery depend on the car's equipment and function.

IMPORTANT

If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Related information Starter battery - replacement (p. 379)

Starter battery - general (p. 377)

Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are pro- tected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Location of central electrical units

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides.

Engine compartment

Under the glovebox

Under the glovebox

Cargo area under the cargo floor

Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/ Stop)

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 385)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)

Fuses - in the control module under the glo- vebox (p. 391)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

384

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

385

Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.386

General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper

Engine compartment, front

Engine compartment, lower

These fuses are all located in the engine com- partment box. The fuses in (C) are located under (A).

On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.

Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a work- shop15.

Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop15.

Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

Function AA

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the gloveboxB

50

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

50

Primary fuse for central elec- trical unit in cargo areaB

60

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the glovebox

60

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the gloveboxB

60

- -

Electric additional heater*B 100

Heated windscreen*B , left- hand side

40

Windscreen wipers 30

Parking heater* 25

Ventilation fanC 40

Function AA

Heated windscreen*B , right- hand side

40

ABS pump 40

ABS valves 20

Headlamp washers* 20

Headlamp levelling*; Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*

10

Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

20

ABS 5

Adjustable steering force* 5

Engine control module; Trans- mission control module; Air- bags

10

Heated washer nozzles* 10

- -

Headlamp control 5

- -

15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 387

Function AA

- -

- -

Relay coils 5

Auxiliary lamps* 20

Horn 15

Relay coil in main relay for engine management system (4-cyl.); Engine control module (4-cyl.)

5

Relay coil in main relay for engine management system (5-cyl. diesel); Engine control module (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Transmission control module 15

Supporting coolant pump (4- cyl. diesel)

15

Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment cold zone Start/Stop

5

- -

Function AA

Glow control module (5-cyl. diesel)

10

Engine control module (4-cyl.) 20

Engine control module (5-cyl. diesel)

15

Engine control module (4-cyl.) 20

Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl.); Thermostat(4-cyl. petrol); EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (4-cyl. diesel)

10

Mass airflow meter (5-cyl. die- sel); Control valves (5-cyl. die- sel)

15

Solenoid clutch A/C (5-cyl. diesel); Valves (5-cyl. diesel); Oil level sensor

10

Valves (4-cyl.); Oil pump (4-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sond, centre (4-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl. diesel)

15

Function AA

Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl.); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl. pet- rol)

Lambda-sonds (5-cyl. diesel); Control module, radiator roller cover (5-cyl. diesel)

15

Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol) 15

Diesel filter heater (diesel) 20

Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl.); Glow control module (4-cyl. diesel); Oil pump (4-cyl. diesel)

7.5

Crankcase ventilation heater (5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump auto- matic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel Start/Stop)

10

Coolant pump (4-cyl. petrol) 50

Glow plugs (diesel) 70

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

388

Function AA

Cooling fan (petrol) 60/80D

Cooling fan (diesel) 80

Power steering 100

A Ampere B For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty

- see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395).

C For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395).

D Depending on cooling fan variant.

Related information Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)

Fuses - in the control module under the glo- vebox (p. 391)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 389

Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotain- ment system and seat functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function AA

Primary fuse for audio control mod- ule*; Primary fuse for fuses 16-20: Infotainment

40

Windscreen washers; Rear window washer

25

- -

Function AA

- -

- -

Door handles, keyless system* 5

- -

Control panel, driver's door 20

Function AA

Control panel, front passenger door 20

Control panel, rear passenger door, right

20

Control panel, rear passenger door, left

20

Keyless system* 7.5

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.390

Function AA

Power seat, driver's side* 20

Power seat, passenger side* 20

- -

Infotainment Control Module or ScreenB

5

Audio control unit (amplifier)*; TV*; Digital radio*

10

Audio control module or Control module SensusB

15

Telematics*; Bluetooth* 5

- -

Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof; Cli- mate sensor*

5

12 V socket, tunnel console 15

Seat heating, rear right* 15

Seat heating, rear left* 15

Electric additional heater* 5

Seat heating, front passenger side 15

Seat heating, front driver's side 15

Function AA

Parking assistance*; Parking cam- era*; BLIS*

5

AWD control module* 15

Active chassis Four-C* 10

A Ampere B Certain model variants.

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 385)

Fuses - in the control module under the glo- vebox (p. 391)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 391

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox Fuses in the control module under the glovebox protect airbag and collision warning system functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function AA

Rear window wiper 15

- -

Interior lighting; Driver's door con- trol panel, power windows; Power seats*

7.5

Function AA

Combined instrument panel 5

Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; colli- sion warning system*

10

Interior lighting; Rain sensor* 7.5

Steering wheel module 7.5

Function AA

Central locking system, fuel filler flap

10

Heated steering wheel* 15

Heated windscreen* 15

Unlocking, tailgate 10

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.392

Function AA

Folding head restraint* 10

Fuel pump 20

Movement detector for alarm*; Cli- mate panel

5

Steering lock 15

Siren*; Data link connector OBDII 5

- -

Airbags 10

Collision warning system* 5

Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming interior rearview mirror*; Seat heat- ing, rear*

7.5

Infotainment control module (Per- formance); Audio (Performance)

15

Brake light 5

Sunroof* 20

Immobiliser 5

A Ampere

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 385)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 393

Fuses - in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect the electric park- ing brake, amongst other things.

Positions

Function AA

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

Rear window defroster 30

Trailer socket 2* 15

- -

Function AA

12 V socket, cargo area 15

- -

- -

- -

- -

Function AA

Trailer socket 1* 40

- -

A Ampere

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 385)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

394

Fuses - in the control module under the glo- vebox (p. 391)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 395)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 395

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.

Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a work- shop16.

Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop16.

Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.

For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/ Stop* (p. 290).

Positions

Function AA

Main fuse for central electrical unit in the engine compartment

175

Function AA

Main fuse for central electronic module (CEM) under the glove- box, relay/fuse box under the glo- vebox, central electrical unit in cargo area

175

Electric additional heater* 100

16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.396

Function AA

Primary fuse for the central elec- tronic module (CEM) under the glovebox

50

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box under the glovebox

60

Heated windscreen* 60

Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo area

60

Ventilation fan 40

- -

- -

Start relay 30

- -

Support battery 70

Central electronic module (CEM) - reference voltage support battery

5

A Ampere

Related information Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 385)

Fuses - under glovebox (p. 389)

Fuses - in the control module under the glo- vebox (p. 391)

Fuses - in cargo area (p. 393)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

397

Car wash The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean as the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.

Handwashing Remove bird droppings from the paintwork

as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain substances that affect and discolour paint- work very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended for the removal of any discoloration.

Hose down the underbody.

Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has been removed in order to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces must not then be warmed up by the sun!

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing water droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the

risk of water stains that may need to be pol- ished away is reduced.

WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte- rior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach every- where. Washing the car by hand is recommended

to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto- matic car washes with washing by hand.

NOTE

The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweep- ing movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking perform- ance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

* Option/accessory.398

Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

For cleaning:

- Set the wiper blades to the service position, see Wiper blades (p. 374).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu- larly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.

The frames around the side windows, the car's roof rails and the door frames at the windows* are produced in anodised aluminium. This means that they should only be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. This is in order to avoid discolouration.

Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano- dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows.

Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura- tion and destroy the surface treatment.

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.

After washing, discolouration at the base of the spokes may remain due to metal dust from the brake discs attaching in the wheel rim's paint. Paint cleaner works in many cases, with very fine polishing using a soft cloth.

Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur- face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi- nium rims.

Related information Polishing and waxing (p. 399)

Cleaning the interior (p. 400)

Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 399)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

}}

* Option/accessory. 399

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rub- bing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the pack- aging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as pre- serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paint- work damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.

Related information Car wash (p. 397)

Water and dirt-repellent coating The windows are treated with a surface coating that improves visibility in difficult weather condi- tions.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the water- repellent coating.

Maintenance:

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to dam- age the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water-repellent prop- erties on the side windows. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 107).

||

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

400

Related information Car wash (p. 397)

Rustproofing The car received a thorough and complete rust- proofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavi- ties, closed sections and side doors.

Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection does not nor- mally need to be maintained, but keeping the car clean always helps to further reduce the risk of corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu- tions must always be avoided on the glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered.

Related information Paint damage (p. 402)

Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible.

Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials.

Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical but- tons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent.

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the properties of the upholstery. The

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

401

fabric care product is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating.

To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the cleaning and application of the protective cream once to four times per year (or more if required). The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for purchase from a Volvo dealer.

Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended for cleaning the leather steering wheel.

Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois- tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur- faces.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.

Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Inlay mats and floor mat Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac- uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.

WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adja- cent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats must be cleaned with agents recommended by a Volvo dealer.

Related information Car wash (p. 397)

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

402

Paint damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof- ing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.

Materials that may be needed

Primer17 - for e.g. bumpers, there are special adhesive primers available in spray cans.

Base coat and clear coat - are available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18.

Masking tape.

Fine sand paper17.

Colour code The label for colour code is located on the car's door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Exterior colour code

Any secondary exterior colour code

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designations (p. 406).

Repairing minor paint damage such as stone chips and scratches

G 0 2 1 8 3 2

Before work is started, the car must be clean and dry as well as at a temperature above 15 C.

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam- aged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

If the damage has reached down to a metal surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use a primer. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used for better results - spray into the spray can's cap and brush thinly.

17 If required. 18 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

403

2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and allow to dry.

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with base coat and clear coat once the primer has dried.

4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

NOTE

If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.

Related information Rustproofing (p. 400)

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

406

Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

407

Label location

The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden- tification and engine numbers can facilitate all

||

SPECIFICATIONS

408

contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica- tion number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is posi- tioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.

Label for A/C system.

Label for parking heater.

Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car.

Related information Weights (p. 410)

Engine specifications (p. 412)

Specifications for air conditioning (p. 420)

SPECIFICATIONS

409

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

V60CCA Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2774

B Length 4637

C Load length, floor, folded rear seat 1749

D Load length, floor 978

E Height 1545

F Load height 658

V60CCA Dimensions mm

G Front track 1619B

1609C

H Rear track 1577B

1567C

I Load width, floor 1082

J Width 1866

V60CCA Dimensions mm

K Width including door mir- rors 2097

L Width including folded-in door mirrors 1899

A V60 Cross Country B Tyre width 215 mm. C Tyre width 235 mm.

SPECIFICATIONS

410

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (p. 411) (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own particular car.

WARNING The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For information on label location, see Type designations (p. 406).

Max. gross vehicle weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

Related information Towing capacity and towball load (p. 411)

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 422)

SPECIFICATIONS

* Option/accessory. 411

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V60CCA

Engine

Engine codeB Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

T5 B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1600 75

T5 AWD B4204T11 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

D3 D4204T4 Manual, M66 1800 90

D3 D4204T4 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

D4 D4204T14 Manual, M66 1800 90

D4 D4204T14 Automatic, TG-81SC 1800 90

D4 AWD D5244T21 Automatic, TF-80SD 1900 90

A V60 Cross Country B Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 406).

Max. weight unbraked trailer

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)

750 50

Related information Weights (p. 410)

Driving with a trailer* (p. 317)

SPECIFICATIONS

412

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V60CCA

Engine

Engine codeB Output

(kW/rpm)

Output

(hp/rpm)

Torque

(Nm/rpm)

No. of cylinders Bore

(mm)

Stroke

(mm)

Swept volume

(litres)

Compression ratio

T5 / T5 AWD B4204T11 180/5500 245/5500 350/15004800 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 10.8:1

D3 D4204T4 110/4250 150/4250 350/1500-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1

D4 D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4 82.0 93.2 1,969 15.8:1

D4 AWD D5244T21 140/4000 190/4000 440/1500-2750 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1

A V60 Cross Country B Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 406).

Related information Coolant - grade and volume (p. 416)

Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 414)

SPECIFICATIONS

413

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level (p. 360) more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hotter than +40 C.

The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends:

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting charac- teristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car- ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 414)

Engine oil - general (p. 359)

SPECIFICATIONS

414

Engine oil - grade and volume Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Volvo recommends:

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V60CCA

Engine

Engine codeB Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

T5 / T5 AWD B4204T11 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.9

D3 D4204T4 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx 5.2

D4 D4204T14 approx 5.2

D4 AWD D5244T21 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

approx. 5.9

A V60 Cross Country B Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 406).

SPECIFICATIONS

415

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 413)

Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 360)

SPECIFICATIONS

416

Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V60CCA

EngineB

Volume

(litres)

T5 / T5 AWD B4204T11 8,3 (8,7C)

D4 AWD D5244T21 8.9

D3 D4204T4 8,9 (9,2C)

D4 D4204T14

A V60 Cross Country B Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the

engine; see Type designations (p. 406). C Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.

Related information Coolant - level (p. 362)

1 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

SPECIFICATIONS

417

Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

M66 approx. 1.45 BOT 350M3

Automatic gearbox

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

TF-80SD approx 7.0 AW1

TG-81SC approx. 6.6A

approx. 7.5B AW1

A Petrol engines B Diesel engines

NOTE

The transmission fluid does not need to be changed under normal driving conditions. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

Related information Engine oil - adverse driving conditions

(p. 413)

Type designations (p. 406)

SPECIFICATIONS

418

Brake fluid - grade and volume Brake fluid is the term for the medium in a hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer pressure from the master brake cylinder to the mechanical brakes.

Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or equivalent.

Volume: 0.6 litres

Related information Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 363)

Power steering fluid - grade Power steering fluid is the denomination of the medium used in the car's power steering sys- tem.

Prescribed grade: Power steering fluid recom- mended by Volvo.

Related information Power steering fluid - level (p. 364)

SPECIFICATIONS

419

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine Volume (litres) Prescribed grade

Petrol engine approx 67 Fuel - petrol (p. 312)

Diesel engine approx 67 Fuel - diesel (p. 313)

Related information Filling up with fuel (p. 310)

Engine specifications (p. 412)

SPECIFICATIONS

420

Specifications for air conditioning The climate control system in the car uses a refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a, depend- ing on market. Information about which refriger- ant the car's climate control system uses can be seen on a decal, located on the inside of the bonnet.

Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below.

A/C decal

Decal for R134a

The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.

Decal for R1234yf

The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.

Symbol explanation R1234yf

Symbol Meaning

Caution

Mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Lubricant type

Symbol Meaning

A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC)

Flammable refrigerants

Refrigerant

Cars with refrigerant R134a

Engine Weight Prescribed grade

5-cylinder diesel 720 g R134a

other 800 g

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

SPECIFICATIONS

421

Cars with refrigerant R1234yf

Weight Prescribed grade

750 g R1234yf

WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressur- ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system.

Compressor oil

Engine Volume Prescribed grade

4-cylinder 60 ml PAG SP-A2

5-cylinder 110 ml PAG SP-A2

Evaporator

IMPORTANT

The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi- fied and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842.

Related information Climate control system - fault tracing and

repair (p. 365)

Type designations (p. 406)

SPECIFICATIONS

422

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams CO2 per km.

Explanation

gram CO2/km

litre/100 km

Urban driving

Extra-urban driving

Combined driving

manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

NOTE

If the consumption and emission data is miss- ing then it is included in the enclosed supple- ment.

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

V60CCA

T5 (B4204T11) 201 8.7 125 5.4 153 6.6

T5 AWD (B4204T11) 223 9.8 136 6.0 168 7.4

D3B (D4204T4) 120 4.6 106 4.0 111 4.2

D3C (D4204T4) 119 4.6 105 4.0 110 4.2

D3 (D4204T4) 137 5.3 110 4.2 120 4.6

D4B (D4204T14) 120 4.6 106 4.0 111 4.2

SPECIFICATIONS

}}

423

V60CCA

D4C (D4204T14) 119 4.6 105 4.0 110 4.2

D4 (D4204T14) 137 5.3 110 4.2 120 4.6

D4 AWD (D5244T21) 178 6.8 132 5.1 149 5.7

A V60 Cross Country B Does not apply to the low-emissions variant. C This only applies to the low-emissions variant.

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU driving cycles (see below), that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consump- tion and carbon dioxide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel con- sumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:

If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects the car's weight.

The driver's driving style.

If the customer chooses wheels other than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version then rolling resistance may increase.

High speed results in increased wind resis- tance.

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

A combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly increased consumption.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles (see below) which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to.

NOTE

Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina- tion with fuel quality are factors that consider- ably increase the car's fuel consumption.

||

SPECIFICATIONS

424

EU driving cycles Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accord- ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality control, there are significant requirements for repeatability of the tests. For this reason the tests are carried out under close scrutiny and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). As a consequence of this the results from the official figures are not obviously representative of what the customer sees during actual usage.

The regulations cover the driving cycles for "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving":

Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simu- lated.

Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.

Cars with manual gearbox are started in 2nd gear.

The official value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Extra-urban driving" driving cycles, in accordance with legal requirements.

The exhaust gases are collected in order to extrapolate the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2

emissions) during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2

emissions.

Related information Economical driving (p. 316)

Weights (p. 410)

SPECIFICATIONS

425

Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions In certain countries not all approved dimensions are indicated by the registration document or other documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.

Information on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-wheel drive (AWD) and the type of trans- mission is needed to read the table. For informa- tion with respect to these details, see Type des- ignations (p. 406).

For information on the minimum permitted load index (LI) and the minimum permitted speed rat- ing (SS), see Load index and speed rating (p. 426).

= Approved

V60CCA

Engine

man/

aut

215/65R16

7Jx16x50

235/55R17

7.5Jx17x55

235/50R18

7.5Jx18x55

235/45R19

8Jx19x55

T5 (B4204T11) aut

T5 AWD (B4204T11) aut

D3 (D4204T4) man/aut

D4 (D4204T14) man/aut

D4 AWD (D5244T21) aut A V60 Cross Country

Related information Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 334)

SPECIFICATIONS

426

Load index and speed rating The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Informa-

tion on engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all- wheel drive (AWD) and the type of transmission is needed to read the table. For information with

respect to these details, see Type designations (p. 406).

V60CCA

Engine

man/

aut Minimum permitted load index (LI)B Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)C

T5 B4204T11 aut 95 H

T5 AWD B4204T11 aut 95 H

D3 D4204T4 man/aut 95 H

D4 D4204T14 man/aut 95 H

D4 AWD D5244T21 aut 95 H

A V60 Cross Country B The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. C The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.

Related information Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions

(p. 425)

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 427)

Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - load index (p. 335)

Tyres - speed ratings (p. 335)

SPECIFICATIONS

427

Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

V60CCA

Engine

Tyre size Speed

(km/h)

Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureB

Front

(kPa)C

Rear

(kPa)

Front

(kPa)

Rear

(kPa)

Front/rear

(kPa)

All engines

215/65 R 16

235/55 R 17

235/50 R 18

235/45 R 19

0 - 160D 230 230 260 260 260

160+E 240 240 280 280 -

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80F 420 420 420 420 -

A V60 Cross Country B Economical driving. C In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. D 0 - 100 mph E 100+ mph F max 50 mph

Related information Wheels and tyres - approved dimensions

(p. 425)

Tyres - dimensions (p. 334)

Tyres - air pressure (p. 332)

Type designations (p. 406)

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

429

A

ACC Adaptive cruise control 204

Active bending lights 96

Active chassis - FOUR-C 190

Active main beam 94

Active Park Assist 268 function 269 Limitations 272 operation 270 Symbols and messages 273

Active xenon headlamps 96

Active Yaw Control 191

Adaptation of headlamp beam 97

Adapting driving characteristics 190

Adaptive Cruise Control 204 change cruise control functionality 213 deactivate 211 fault tracing 214 function 205 managing speed 207 overtaking 210 overview 206 radar sensor 217 setting the time interval 209 standby mode 209 temporary deactivation 209

Additional heater electric 146, 147 fuel-driven 146

Adjusting the steering wheel 88

Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS 36 driver's side 34 passenger side 34, 36

AIRBAG 34

Airbag system 33 warning symbol 32

Air cleaning material 129 passenger compartment 127, 128, 129

Air conditioning 136

Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade 420

Air conditioning system repair 365

Air distribution 129 Recirculation 137 table 138

Air quality system IAQS 128

Alarm 185, 186, 187 alarm indicator 186 alarm signals 187 automatic re-arming 186

checking the alarm 168 reduced alarm level 187 remote control key not working 187

Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 128

All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 288

All Wheel Drive (AWD) 288

Approach lighting 101, 166

Automatic car washes 397

Automatic gearbox 284 manual gear positions (Geartronic) 284 towing and recovery 325 trailer 318

Automatic relocking 178

AWD, All Wheel Drive 288

B

Backrest 83 front seat, lowering 83 rear seat, folding 86

Bag holder 156

Battery 281, 308, 377 jump starting 281 maintenance 377 overload 308 remote control key/PCC 172 start 377

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

430

support 380 symbols on the battery 378 warning symbols 378

BLIS 240, 241

Bonnet, opening 357

Book service and repair 352

Booster seat lowering 53 raising 52 seating position 51

Brake and clutch fluid 363

Brake fluid grade and volume 418

Brake light 98

Brakes 300, 302 Anti-lock braking system, ABS 301 brake light 98 brake system 300, 301, 302 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA 302 filling brake fluid 364 handbrake 303 symbols in the combined instrument panel 301

bulbs, specifications 373

C

Camera sensor 224, 236

Car care 397 Leather upholstery 401

Cargo area cargo cover 159 lighting 100 mounting points 156 protective net 157

Cargo cover 159

Cargo grille 159

Car key memory 163

Car upholstery 400

Car washing 397

Catalytic converter 315 Recovery 325

Chassis settings 190

Checking the engine oil level 360

Children child safety locks 44 child seat and airbag 50 child seats and side airbags 38 location in car 50 safety 44

Child safety locks 184

Child seat integrated two-stage booster seat 51 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats 54

Child seats 44 recommended 45 size classes for child seats with ISOFIX fixture system 55 types 56 upper mounting points for child seats 58

City Safety 222

Cleaning automatic car wash 397 car washing 397 rims 398 seatbelts 401 upholstery 400

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) 128

Climate control actual temperature 127 auto-regulation 135 general 126 personal preferences 129 sensors 127 temperature control 135

Clock, adjustment 76

CO2 emissions 422

Collision 42

Collision warning 229, 230

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

431

Collision warning system function 230 general limitations 235 operation 233 Pedestrian detection 232 Radar sensor 217, 223

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake 229

Colour code, paint 402

Combined instrument panel 66, 67

Compass 108 calibration 109

Condensation in headlamps 397

Controls lighting 91

Control symbols 67, 69

Coolant volume and grade 416

Coolant, checking and filling 362

Cooling system 307 overheating 307

Cornering lights 97

Corner Traction Control 191

Crash, see Collision 42

Cruise control 198 deactivate 200 managing speed 199

resume set speed 200 temporary deactivation 199

CTA 242

Cyclist detection 231

CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package) 128

D

Daytime running lights 92

Deadlock 183 deactivation 183 temporary deactivation 183

Defroster 136

Detachable towbar storage 320

Diesel 313 run out of fuel 313

Diesel particle filter 314

Dimensions 409

Dipstick, electronic 360, 361

Direction indicator 99

Direction indicators 99

direction of rotation 331

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 287

Display lighting 91

Distance Warning 201 Limitations 202 Symbols and messages 203

Door mirrors 106 automatic dimming 106 resetting 106

Drive mode ECO 298

Driver Alert Control 249 operation 249

Driver Alert System 248

Driving 309 cooling system 307 with the tailgate open 308

Driving in water 307

Driving with a trailer 317 towball load 411 towing capacity 411

E

ECC, electronic climate control 132

Eco Cruise 298

EcoGuide 70

Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual 25

ECO mode 298

Economical driving 316

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

432

ECO pressure 427

Electrical socket 153 cargo area 157

Electrical system 383

Electric parking brake low battery voltage 303

Electronic climate control - ECC 132

Emergency equipment first aid kit 342 warning triangle 341

Emergency puncture repair 345, 346 action 347 inflating the tyres 350 rechecking 349

Emergency puncture repair kit location 346 overview 346

Emissions of carbon dioxide 422

Engine deactivate 277 overheating 307 start 276 Start/Stop 290

Engine and passenger compartment heater messages 144 timer 142

Engine block heater 140

Engine block heater and passenger com- partment heater

direct start 141 immediate stop 142

Engine braking, automatic 289

Engine compartment Brake and clutch fluid 363 Check 358 coolant 362 Engine oil 359 overview 357 power steering fluid 364

Engine drag control 191

Engine oil 359, 413 adverse driving conditions 413 filter 359 grade and volume 414

Engine oil, filling 360

Engine specifications 412

Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control 215 Driver Alert Control 251 Lane Departure Warning 255 LKA 260 see Messages and symbols 215, 305

Error messages in BLIS 244

ERS - Remote Start 277

Ethanol content maximum 10 percent by volume 312

exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in 308

External dimensions 409

F

Fan ECC 134

Fault tracing for the camera sensor 225

First aid 342

First aid kit 342

Fluids, capacities 376, 416, 417, 418, 419, 420

Fluids and oils 416, 417, 418, 420

Fog lamp rear 97

Foot brake 300, 301, 302

FOUR-C - Active chassis 190

FSC, ecolabelling 25

Fuel 311, 312, 313 fuel consumption 422 fuel economy 332, 333 fuel filter 314 identifier 312, 313

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

433

Fuel-driven heater timer 142

Fuelling filling 310 fuel cap 310 fuel filler flap 310 fuel filler flap, manual opening 310

Fuel tank volume 419

Fuse box 383

Fuses changing 383 General 383 in cargo area 393 in engine compartment 385 In the control module under the glove- box 391 in the engine compartment's cold zone 395 under glovebox 389

G

Gearbox 282 automatic 284 manual 282

Gear selector inhibitor 287

Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement 287

Gear shift indicator 283

Geartronic 284

Glass laminated/reinforced 25

Glovebox 152 locking 181

Gross vehicle weight 410

GSI - Gear selector assistance 283

H

Handbrake 303

Hazard warning flashers 98

HDC 289

Headlamp beam adaptation 97 height adjustment 91

Headlamp control 90

Headlamp levelling of headlamps 91

Headlamp pattern, adjusting 97

Headlamp pattern adjustment 97

Headlamps 367

head restraint centre seat, rear 85 lowering 85, 87

Heated washer nozzles 103

Heating rearview and door mirrors 107 rear window 107 seats 133, 134 steering wheel 89 windscreen 107

Heat-reflecting windscreen 20

High engine temperature 307

High-pressure headlamp washing 103

Hill Descent Control 289

Hill Start Assist 288

Home safe light duration 101

Horn 89

I

IAQS - Interior Air Quality System 128

Immobiliser 165

Indicator symbols 71

Inflatable curtain 39

Information button, PCC 167, 168

Information display 66, 67

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

434

Inlaid mats 153

Instrument lighting 91

Instrument overview left-hand drive car 60 right-hand drive car 63

Instruments and controls 60, 63

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning 128

Interior lighting 100

Interior rearview mirror 108 automatic dimming 108

Intermittent wiping 102

Internet-connected car book service and repair 352

J

Jack 342

Journey statistics 124

Jump starting 281

K

Kerb weight 410

Key 162, 164

Key blade 169, 170

Keyless drive 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 276

Keyless - locking 175

Keyless start (keyless drive) 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 276

Keyless - unlocking 176

Keypad in the steering wheel 88

Key positions 81

L

Labels 406

Laminated glass 25

Lamps 365

Lane assistance operation 254, 258

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 252, 253, 254

Lane Keeping Aid - LKA 256, 257

Lane keeping assistant operation 259

Laser sensor 226

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 401

Light indications, PCC 168

Lighting active bending lights 96 active xenon headlamps 96 approach lighting 101, 166 automatic lighting, passenger compart- ment 100 Automatic main beam 94 bulbs, specifications 373 controls 90, 100 controls lighting 91 cornering lights 97 daytime running lights 92 display lighting 91 headlamp levelling 91 home safe lighting 101 instrument lighting 91 in the passenger compartment 100 main/dipped beam 93 position lamps 91 rear fog lamp 97 tunnel detection 93

Lighting, bulb replacement 365 bulb holder, rear 371 cargo area 372 dipped beam (cars with halogen head- lamps) 368 direction indicators, front 370 main beam (cars with active xenon headlamps) 370

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

435

main beam (cars with halogen head- lamps) 369 number plate lighting 372 vanity mirror 372

LKA - Lane Keeping Aid 256, 257

Loading cargo area 154 General 154 long load 155 roof load 156

Lock locking 178 manual locking 178 unlocking 178, 179

Lockable wheel bolts 336

Lock confirmation 164

Lock indicator 164

Locking/unlocking glovebox 181 inside 179 tailgate 181

M

Main/dipped beam 93

Main beam, automatic activation 94

maintenance Rustproofing 400

Manual gearbox 282 GSI - Gear selector assistance 283 Towing and recovery 325 trailer 318

Manual gear positions (Geartronic) 284

Max. roof load 410

Memory function in seat 84

Menus Combined instrument panel 112 menu overview 113

Messages 114

Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control 215 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 228, 238 Driver Alert Control 251 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater 144 Lane Departure Warning 255 LKA 260

Messages in BLIS 244

Messages in the information display 113

Meters fuel gauge 66, 68 speedometer 66, 68 tachometer 66, 68

Mileage 116

misting attending to the windows 126

Misting condensation in headlamps 397

Mood lighting 101

MY CAR 115

O

Oil, see also Engine oil 413, 414

Oil level low 360

Option/accessory 16

Output 412

outside temperature gauge 75

Overheating 307, 317

Owner's manual, ecolabelling 25

P

PACOS 36

Paddle on the steering wheel 88

Paintwork colour code 402 damage and touch-up 402

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

436

Panic function 166

PAP - Active Park Assist 268

Park Assist 261, 263 backward 262 fault indicator 264 function 261 parking assistance sensors 264

Park assist camera 265 settings 267

Parking brake 303

Passenger compartment filter 128

Passenger compartment heater 140

Passenger compartment lighting automatic 100

PCC Personal Car Communicator functions 166 range 168, 174

Pedestrian detection 229

Personal Car Communicator 168

Petrol grade 312

Pinch protection, sunroof 111

Pocket park assist - PAP 268

Polishing 399

Position lamp 91

Power guide 70

Power seat 84

Power steering fluid Checking the level 364 grade 418

Power sunroof 110

Power windows 104 resetting 105

Privacy locking 171

Protective grille 159

Puncture 345

Q

Queue Assist 211

Queue assistance 211

R

Radar sensor 205 Limitations 217

Rain sensor 102

Raising the car 355

Rear bulbs location 371

Rear seat Heating 134

Rearview and door mirrors compass 108 door 106 electrically retractable 107 heating 107 interior 108

Rear window heating 107

Recommendations during driving 309

Recommended child seats table 45

Recovery 326

Refrigerant 365

Regeneration 314

Remote control immobiliser 165

Remote control key 162, 163, 164 battery replacement 172 detachable key blade 169, 170 functions 166 loss 162 range 167, 174

Remote control key system, type approval 188

Remote Start - ERS 277

Resetting, trip meter 119, 122

Resetting the door mirrors 106

Resetting the power windows 105

Retractable power door mirrors 107

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

437

Reverse gear inhibitor 283

Road sign information 244 Limitations 248 operation 245

Roll-over protection ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) 41

Roof load, max. weight 410

ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) 41

Rustproofing 400

S

Safety lock children 44

Safety mode 42 moving the car 43 start attempt 43

Seat, see Seats 83

Seatbelt 28 loosen 30 pregnancy 30 putting on 29 rear seat 31 seatbelt reminder 31 seatbelt tensioner 31

Seatbelt reminder 31

Seatbelt tensioner 31

Seats 83 head restraints, rear 85 heating 134 Heating 133 lowering the front backrest 83 lowering the rear backrest 86 power 84

Sensus 80

Service position 374

Service programme 352

Set time interval 201

Side airbag SIPS 38

SIPS airbag 38

Skidding 309

slippery driving conditions 309

Soot filter 314

SOOT FILTER FULL 314

spare wheel 337 installation 340

Speed limiter 195 alarm for speed exceeded 197 deactivation 197 getting started 195, 196 temporary deactivation 196

Speed ratings, tyres 335

Spin control 191

Stability and traction control system 191, 193 operation 192

Stability system 191

Stains 400

Start/Stop 290 function and operation 291 the engine does not stop 292

Starter battery changing 379

Steering force, speed related 190

Steering force level, see Steering force 190

Steering lock 277

Steering wheel 88 heating 89 keypad 88 paddle 88 steering wheel adjustment 88

Stone chips and scratches 402

Storage spaces glovebox 152 tunnel console 152

Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment 150

Sunroof opening and closing 110 pinch protection 111

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

438

sunscreen 111 ventilation position 111

Sunscreen, sunroof 111

Support 15

Support battery 380

Switching off the engine 277

Symbols indicator symbols 67, 69, 71 warning symbols 67, 69

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control 215 Collision Warning with Auto Brake 228, 238 Driver Alert Control 251 Lane Departure Warning 255 LKA 260

T

Tailgate Locking/unlocking 181

Temperature actual temperature 127

Temperature control 135

Through-load hatch 155

TM - Tyre Monitor 343

Tools 341

Total airing function 126, 180

Towbar detachable, attachment 321 detachable, removal 322

Towbar, see Towing equipment 319

Towbar - detachable attachment/removal 321, 322

Towing 324 towing eye 325

Towing bracket 319, 320 specifications 320

Towing capacity and towball load 411

Towing eye 325

TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring 343

Traction control 191

Trailer 317 cable 317 driving with a trailer 317 snaking 323

Trailer stability assist 192

Trailer Stability Assist 323

Transmission 282

Transmission oil volume and grade 417

Transponder 20

Tread depth 336

Tread wear indicators 332

Trip computer 116, 118, 121, 124

Trip meter 75, 116

Trip meter, resetting 119, 122

Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 214

TSA - trailer stability assist 192, 323

Tunnel console 152 12 V socket 153 cigarette lighter and ashtray 152

Tunnel detection 93

Type approval radar system 219 remote control key system 188

Type designations 406

Tyre dimension 334

Tyre load index 335

Tyre monitoring 343

Tyre pressure label 332

Tyre pressure monitoring 343

Tyres dimensions 425 direction of rotation 331 maintenance 330 pressure 332, 427

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

439

puncture repair 345 specifications 425, 426, 427 tread depth 336 tread wear indicators 332 tyre pressure monitoring 343 winter tyres 336

U

Unlocking from the inside 179 from the outside 178

Unlocking with the key blade 176

V

Vanity mirror 153 lighting 100

Ventilation 129

Vibration damper 319

Volvo ID 21

Volvo Sensus 80

W

Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control 205 collision warning system 233 stability and traction control system 191

Warning lamps Airbags SRS 73 alternator not charging 73 Fault in brake system 73 Low oil pressure 73 Parking brake applied 73 seatbelt reminder 31, 73 Warning 73

Warning sound collision warning system 233

Warning symbols 67, 69, 73

Warning triangle 341

Washer fluid 376

Washer nozzles, heated 103

Washers rear window 103 washer fluid, filling 376 windscreen 103

Water and dirt-repellent coating 399

Water-repellent surface, cleaning 399

Waxing 399

Weights kerb weight 410

Wheel bolts 336 lockable 336

Wheel change 337

Wheel rim, dimensions 334

Wheel rims cleaning 398

Wheels installation 340 removal 337 snow chains 336

Wheels and tyres approved dimensions 425 tyre load index and speed rating 426

Whiplash injury, WHIPS 39

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion 39 seating position 40 whiplash protection 39

Windows, rearview and door mirrors 399

Windscreen heating 107, 136

Windscreen washing 103

Windscreen wiper 102 rain sensor 102

Winter driving 309

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

440

Winter tyres 336

Winter wheels 336

Wiper blades 374 changing 374 Cleaning 375 replacing, rear window 375 Service position 374

Wipers and washing 102

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the V60 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo V60 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo V60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo V60 Owners Manual 2017 Cross Country as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.